Manual SIRIUS Innovations en-US
Manual SIRIUS Innovations en-US
Manual SIRIUS Innovations en-US
Industrial Controls
Answers for industry.
SIRIUS Innovations System overview 1
SIRIUS 3RT2
contactors/contactor 2
assemblies
Appendix A A
11/2009
A8E56203870002-01
Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task, in particular its warning notices and
safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of
identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
1 System overview...................................................................................................................................... 19
1.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................19
1.1.1 Modular system for SIRIUS .........................................................................................................19
1.1.2 SIRIUS Innovations......................................................................................................................20
1.2 Safety instructions........................................................................................................................22
1.3 Standards and approvals .............................................................................................................23
1.3.1 Standards.....................................................................................................................................23
1.3.2 Approvals, test certificates, characteristics..................................................................................24
1.4 Overview ......................................................................................................................................25
1.4.1 SIRIUS modular system...............................................................................................................25
1.4.2 Content of SIRIUS Innovations System Manual ..........................................................................27
1.5 System properties ........................................................................................................................28
1.5.1 System properties ........................................................................................................................28
1.5.2 Modular system design ................................................................................................................29
1.5.3 Switching technology ...................................................................................................................30
1.5.4 Uniform connection system..........................................................................................................32
1.5.5 Flexible assembly methods..........................................................................................................33
1.5.6 Performance capability ................................................................................................................33
1.5.7 Assembly and mounting...............................................................................................................34
1.5.8 Load feeders ................................................................................................................................34
1.5.9 Application monitoring..................................................................................................................36
1.5.10 Communication ............................................................................................................................37
1.5.11 Safety applications.......................................................................................................................38
1.5.12 Environmental protection .............................................................................................................38
1.5.13 Energy efficiency..........................................................................................................................38
1.6 Customer benefits........................................................................................................................40
1.7 Components and combinations ...................................................................................................42
1.7.1 Switching and starting..................................................................................................................42
1.7.1.1 SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors..............................................................................................................42
1.7.1.2 SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices...............................................................................48
1.7.1.3 SIRIUS 3RW30/40 soft starters ...................................................................................................49
1.7.2 Protecting .....................................................................................................................................51
1.7.2.1 SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors ........................................................................................51
1.7.2.2 SIRIUS 3RV2917 infeed system..................................................................................................54
1.7.2.3 SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays ...........................................................................................55
1.7.3 Monitoring ....................................................................................................................................57
1.7.3.1 SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays ......................................................................................57
1.7.4 Feeders ........................................................................................................................................59
1.7.4.1 SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders ...................................................................................................59
1.7.4.2 SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters ...................................................................................................61
1.7.5 Function modules.........................................................................................................................65
1.7.5.1 SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors..............................66
1.7.5.2 SIRIUS 3RA27 function modules for connection to the automation level ...................................68
1.7.6 Device combinations....................................................................................................................70
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 5
Table of contents
SIRIUS Innovations
6 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Table of contents
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 7
Table of contents
SIRIUS Innovations
8 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Table of contents
2.8.1.10 Rated data for auxiliary contacts (CSA and UL) ........................................................................250
2.8.1.11 Main circuit - 3RT202. contactors (current carrying capacity for direct current)........................251
2.8.1.12 Conductor cross-sections - 3RT202. contactors........................................................................253
2.8.1.13 Rated data (CSA and UL) for 3RT201. and 3RT202. contactors ..............................................255
2.8.2 Contactors for specific applications (3RT23 and 3RT25) ..........................................................257
2.8.2.1 General data, short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay and actuation
(3RT231. and 3RT232. contactors) ...........................................................................................257
2.8.2.2 Main circuit - 3RT231. and 3RT232. (current carrying capacity for alternating current and
direct current) .............................................................................................................................260
2.8.2.3 General data, short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay and actuation
(3RT251. and 3RT252. contactors) ...........................................................................................262
2.8.2.4 Main circuit - 3RT251. and 3RT252. (current carrying capacity for alternating current and
direct current) .............................................................................................................................263
2.8.3 Contactors with extended operating range ................................................................................265
2.8.3.1 Contactors for railway applications ............................................................................................265
2.8.3.2 Coupling relays ..........................................................................................................................266
2.8.4 3RH2 contactor relays ...............................................................................................................270
2.8.4.1 Permissible mounting position, positively driven operation of contacts and contact
reliability of 3RH2 contactor relays (4- and 8-pole)....................................................................270
2.8.4.2 General data, rated data (CSA and UL), and data relating to short-circuit protection for
3RH2. contactor relays ..............................................................................................................271
2.8.4.3 Conductor cross-sections - 3RH2. contactor relays ..................................................................273
2.8.4.4 Actuation - 3RH2. contactor relays ............................................................................................274
2.8.4.5 Load side of 3RH2. contactor relays..........................................................................................276
2.8.5 Accessories for 3RT2 contactors and 3RH2 contactor relays ...................................................278
2.8.5.1 General data - Pneumatic timer 3RT2926-2P. ..........................................................................278
2.8.5.2 General data - OFF-delay device 3RT2916-2B. ........................................................................279
2.8.5.3 General data - Terminal module for contactors with screw connection.....................................281
2.8.5.4 General data - Mechanical latch 3RT2926-3A...........................................................................283
2.8.5.5 General data - Control side and load side - coupling link 3RH2924-1GP11 .............................284
2.9 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm) ..................................................................................286
2.9.1 Contactors and contactor relays (size S00)...............................................................................286
2.9.2 Contactors (size S0) ..................................................................................................................290
2.10 Circuit diagrams .........................................................................................................................293
2.10.1 Contactors and contactor accessories.......................................................................................294
2.10.2 Reversing contactor assembly (S00/S0) ...................................................................................308
2.10.3 Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start ................................................................309
3 SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices ......................................................................................... 313
3.1 Safety instructions......................................................................................................................313
3.1.1 Standards...................................................................................................................................315
3.2 Product description ....................................................................................................................316
3.2.1 Device versions..........................................................................................................................316
3.2.2 Applications................................................................................................................................318
3.2.3 Application environment.............................................................................................................319
3.2.4 Solid-state switching devices .....................................................................................................320
3.2.5 Device labels..............................................................................................................................322
3.2.6 Advantages of solid-state switching devices .............................................................................325
3.3 Product combinations ................................................................................................................326
3.4 Functions....................................................................................................................................327
3.4.1 Actuation of solid-state switching devices .................................................................................328
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 9
Table of contents
SIRIUS Innovations
10 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Table of contents
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 11
Table of contents
SIRIUS Innovations
12 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Table of contents
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 13
Table of contents
SIRIUS Innovations
14 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Table of contents
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 15
Table of contents
7 SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors ...................................................... 641
7.1 Standards...................................................................................................................................641
7.2 Product description ....................................................................................................................642
7.2.1 Device versions..........................................................................................................................643
7.2.2 Performance features ................................................................................................................645
7.2.3 Applications................................................................................................................................646
7.2.3.1 Function modules for direct-on-line start ...................................................................................646
7.2.3.2 Function modules for star-delta (wye-delta) start ......................................................................647
7.2.4 3RA28 function modules............................................................................................................649
7.3 Product combinations ................................................................................................................650
7.3.1 Product combinations ................................................................................................................650
7.4 Functions....................................................................................................................................651
7.4.1 Overvoltage protection...............................................................................................................651
7.4.2 Time-delayed switching of contactors........................................................................................651
7.4.2.1 Response delay .........................................................................................................................651
7.4.2.2 OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage................................................................................................653
7.4.2.3 OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage...........................................................................................654
7.4.2.4 Star-delta (wye-delta) function ...................................................................................................655
7.5 Configuration..............................................................................................................................656
7.5.1 Configuration..............................................................................................................................656
7.6 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................660
7.6.1 Mounting instructions .................................................................................................................660
7.6.2 Minimum clearances and mounting position..............................................................................660
7.6.3 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................660
7.6.3.1 Function modules for direct-on-line start (solid-state timing relay with semiconductor
output/solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch) ...........................................................................660
7.6.3.2 Function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start ........................................................................662
7.6.4 Disassembly...............................................................................................................................665
7.6.4.1 Function modules for direct-on-line start (solid-state timing relay with semiconductor
output/solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch) ...........................................................................665
7.6.4.2 Function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start ........................................................................666
7.6.5 Replacing the removable terminal .............................................................................................668
7.7 Connection .................................................................................................................................669
7.7.1 Connecting the function modules for direct-on-line start ...........................................................669
7.7.1.1 Connecting the solid-state timing relay with semiconductor output...........................................669
7.7.1.2 Connecting the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch ..............................................................671
7.7.2 Connecting the function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start ................................................672
7.8 Operation ...................................................................................................................................673
7.8.1 Setting the times ........................................................................................................................673
7.9 Accessories................................................................................................................................674
7.9.1 Sealable cover cap ....................................................................................................................674
7.10 Technical data............................................................................................................................675
7.11 Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................677
7.11.1 Solid-state timing relays with semiconductor output and solid-state time-delay auxiliary
switches .....................................................................................................................................677
7.11.2 Star-delta (wye-delta) modules ..................................................................................................678
7.12 Circuit diagrams .........................................................................................................................679
7.12.1 Internal circuit diagrams.............................................................................................................680
7.12.2 Example circuit diagrams...........................................................................................................681
SIRIUS Innovations
16 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Table of contents
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 17
Table of contents
SIRIUS Innovations
18 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview 1
1.1 Introduction
System is everything: The SIRIUS modular system for the control cabinet
Siemens is one of the most important manufacturers of switching devices, whose product
range extends from devices that switch just a few milliamps to motor starter protectors for
power distribution. The process of configuring control cabinets must be quick, easy, flexible,
and must enable you to create space-saving solutions.
This is exactly what Siemens offers with its unique SIRIUS modular system. This system
offers all the functions and devices you will need for switching, starting, protecting, and
monitoring motors and systems. In other words, it provides a modular range of standard
components, which are perfectly matched to one another, can be combined really easily, and
use the same accessories. That's how easy controls and distribution can be.
Continuous further development and constant innovations ensure that, with SIRIUS, you are
ideally equipped to meet the challenges of today and tomorrow, and can benefit from cost-
effective solutions. All the components that make up the SIRIUS modular system are
characterized by a space-saving design and a high degree of flexibility. Configuration,
installation, wiring, and maintenance work are all extremely quick and easy to perform.
In further developing these products, a great deal of emphasis has consistently been placed
on meeting or even exceeding requirements in terms of essential performance features,
electrical and mechanical durability, dimensions, and ease of mounting and maintenance.
Environmentally-friendly and recyclable materials have been developed and used in the
system to reflect the ecological awareness that has grown at a quite incredible rate over the
last decade in particular. In the field of low-voltage switching devices, this has resulted in the
creation of modern industrial switching devices which fulfill all requirements with regard to
environmental compatibility.
Building on decades of experience, a totally new generation of devices for performing
switching, starting, protecting, and monitoring functions was created for the large and ever
growing number of motorized operating mechanism in the range up to 18.5 kW: SIRIUS
Innovations.
These new SIRIUS devices meet all requirements that have arisen in the field and can be
used as individual devices, as modules for complete load feeders, or installed in low-voltage
distribution boards or low-voltage switchgear. So no matter whether you want to configure
load feeders with motor starter protectors or overload relays, contactors, or soft starters,
SIRIUS has just the product you will need for any application.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 19
System overview
1.1 Introduction
When coming up with these innovations for the SIRIUS modular system, particular
importance was placed on reducing the amount of wiring needed, saving space, reducing the
number of versions available, and providing operational reliability.
SIRIUS Innovations
20 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.1 Introduction
Reduced wiring
The infeed and power distribution options for a group of feeders has also been optimized in
order to reduce the wiring in the main circuit. The SIRIUS 3RV29 infeed system now
benefits, for example, from having a spring-loaded connection system available throughout,
which means that whole groups of feeders can be assembled quickly and without the need
for tools.
Problem-free usage
With its versatile product range, the SIRIUS modular system offers technology which is
suitable for use in all industries and all regions of the world. The products have been tested
in accordance with common standards and have obtained the approvals required to ensure
that they can be used anywhere in the world without any problems.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 21
System overview
1.2 Safety instructions
Explanations
1. The isolating distances between live and de-energized parts of the system must vary
according to the operating voltage that is applied.
In electrical installations, "isolate" refers to the disconnection of all poles of live parts.
Disconnection of all poles can be achieved by, for example:
– Switching off the miniature circuit breaker
– Switching off the motor starter protector
– Unscrewing fuses
– Removing LV HRC fuses
2. The feeder must be secured against inadvertent restarting to ensure that it remains
isolated for the duration of the work. This can be achieved, for instance, by securing the
motor starter protector and miniature circuit breaker with lockable blocking elements in
the disconnected state, either using a lock or by unscrewing the fuses.
3. The deenergized state of the equipment should be verified using suitable test equipment,
e.g. a two-pole voltmeter. Single-pole test pins are not suitable for this purpose. The
absence of power must be established for all poles, phase to phase, and phase to N/PE.
4. Grounding and short-circuiting are only mandatory if the system has a nominal voltage
greater than 1 kV. In this case, the system should always be grounded first and then
connected to the live parts to be short-circuited.
5. These parts should be covered, or barriers erected around them, to avoid accidental
contact during the work with adjacent parts that are still live.
SIRIUS Innovations
22 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.3 Standards and approvals
1.3.1 Standards
The standards from Catalog LV 1 "Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution SIRIUS -
SENTRON - SIVACON" in the appendix always apply. Below are some of the most important
standards which apply to the innovations to the SIRIUS modular system.
Standards
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 23
System overview
1.3 Standards and approvals
SIRIUS Innovations
24 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.4 Overview
1.4 Overview
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 25
System overview
1.4 Overview
Size
Function Components S00 S0 S2 ... S12
Main circuit Switching Contactors
and starting
Solid-state switching
devices
Feeders Feeders
Compact starters
SIRIUS Innovations
26 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.4 Overview
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 27
System overview
1.5 System properties
Reference
You can download the manuals from the Internet (www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support).
Simply enter the order number of the relevant item into the search field.
Notes on further information (product information, product documentation, product selection,
etc.) available on the Internet can be found in the "More information (Page 756)" appendix.
Correction sheet
A Correction sheet (Page 757) is included at the end of the manual. Please use it to record
your suggestions for improvements, additions, and corrections, and return the sheet to us.
This will help us to improve the next edition of the manual.
SIRIUS Innovations
28 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.5 System properties
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 29
System overview
1.5 System properties
Application Technology
Electromechanical • Direct-on-line start • 3RT contactors, 3RA contactor
starting assemblies, or 3RA6 compact starters
• Reversing start • 3RA reversing contactor assemblies
• 3RA6 compact starters
• Star-delta (wye-delta) start • 3RA contactor assemblies for star-delta
(wye-delta) start
Electronic starting • Direct-on-line start • 3RF solid-state switching devices
• Reversing start • 3RF solid-state switching devices
• Soft start • 3RW soft starters
W
ϑ ϑ PD[
WV W
Figure 1-3 Direct switching through current feed of the contactor coil
1 L2 3 L2 5 L3
A1 +
A2 -
A3 +
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
SIRIUS Innovations
30 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.5 System properties
/
8 //
0
/
a
/
G 1G 1
8 //
α α
α α ϕ
Technology selection depends on various factors. The table below provides an overview of
the most important aspects:
Technology
Electromechanical Electronic
3RT contactors, 3RA 3RF solid-state 3RW soft starters
load feeders, or 3RA6 switching devices
compact starters
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 31
System overview
1.5 System properties
SIRIUS Innovations
32 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.5 System properties
The system components are assembled The system components are assembled as a unit
separately (e.g. on separate DIN rails). (e.g. with a link module).
The SIRIUS modular system offers the right solution for every type of assembly:
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 33
System overview
1.5 System properties
$
A Link module
① Slot for link modules
② Slot for conductor connection
③ Screwdriver opening for assembly/disassembly without a link module
Figure 1-6 Link module
SIRIUS Innovations
34 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.5 System properties
The link module is first attached to the device to be connected, then the resulting unit is
plugged on to the motor starter protector. This ensures that the requisite electrical and
mechanical connections are established in the main circuit. Overload relays and current
monitoring relays can easily be attached to contactors and solid-state switching devices in a
similar way, without the need for another link module:
$
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 35
System overview
1.5 System properties
① Application monitoring
② Motor protection
Figure 1-8 Application monitoring
SIRIUS Innovations
36 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.5 System properties
1.5.10 Communication
SIRIUS switching devices can be connected to higher-level control systems using
conventional wiring, but also by means of intelligent wiring and a fieldbus:
● IO-Link
● AS-Interface
SIRIUS switching devices are linked into the Siemens Totally Integrated Automation concept
via function modules. Totally Integrated Automation offers the user uniformity in terms of
configuration, programming, data storage, and communication.
SIRIUS switching devices are connected to the automation level via AS-Interface or IO-Link,
without any additional wiring. These interfaces ensure that information about the switch
position and the readiness of the feeder for operation is transferred, and that contactor
control is implemented. In addition to these three items of information relating to feeders, IO-
Link also transfers diagnostics data.
5HDG\
$FWXDWLRQ
)HHGEDFNRI
VZLWFKLQJVWDWXV
SPS
'LDJQRVWLFV SPS
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 37
System overview
1.5 System properties
Example
SIRIUS contactor in a safety application:
● Motor starter protectors in combination with undervoltage release and contactor:
PL d (ISO 13849-1) or SIL 2 (IEC 62061)
● Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start:
PL e (ISO 13849-1) or SIL 3 (IEC 62061)
SIRIUS Innovations
38 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.5 System properties
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 39
System overview
1.6 Customer benefits
Customer benefits
SIRIUS offers benefits in the following areas:
● Assembly and handling
● Planning and configuration
● Connection to the automation level
● System monitoring
SIRIUS Innovations
40 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.6 Customer benefits
SIRIUS offers the perfect solution throughout the entire product lifecycle:
$XWRPDWLRQVXSSOLHUV
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 41
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
3RT2 contactors
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors and contactor assemblies offer maximum flexibility in terms of
dimensioning, handling, and function:
SIRIUS Innovations
42 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 43
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
SIRIUS Innovations
44 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 45
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
1 Contactor size S0
2 Laterally mountable auxiliary switch block (right or left), 2-pole
3 Auxiliary switch block for snapping onto the front, 1-pole (cable entry from above or below)
4 Auxiliary switch block for snapping onto the front, 4-pole
5 Auxiliary switch block for snapping onto the front, 2-pole (cable entry from above or below)
6 Surge suppressor
7 Function module for AS-Interface, direct-on-line start
8 3RA28 function modules
9 Function module for IO-Link, direct-on-line start
10 Pneumatic delay block
11 Mechanical latch
SIRIUS Innovations
46 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 47
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices feature a heat sink integrated in the insulated
enclosure, so no grounding is required.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
48 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
The SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starters for standard applications in 200 to 480 V systems
(3RW40: 200 to 600 V) provide basic functionalities at cost-optimized prices:
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 49
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
SIRIUS Innovations
50 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
1.7.2 Protecting
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors can be combined with other SIRIUS devices easily
and flexible, while also saving on space and wiring:
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 51
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
8
6
1 Signaling switch
2 Lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts
3 Lateral auxiliary switch with 4 contacts
4 Disconnector module
5 Terminal block type E
6 Undervoltage release
7 Shunt release
8 Transverse auxiliary switch
Figure 1-20 Accessories for 3RV2 motor starter protectors
SIRIUS Innovations
52 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
Infeed systems
The SIRIUS modular system has the right infeed for every requirement.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 53
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
3b
5
3a
5
1
2
5
SIRIUS Innovations
54 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
The thermal and solid-state overload relays are available in the modular system with graded
functionality, which reflects their flexible applicability.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 55
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
SIRIUS Innovations
56 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
1.7.3 Monitoring
The SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays are ideally suited to a range of applications,
thanks to the flexible way in which they can be adjusted:
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 57
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
58 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
1.7.4 Feeders
Load feeders
The tested load feeders offer switching and protection functions. Thanks to their multiple
combination options, they can be easily configured for almost any requirement.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 59
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
60 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
The SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starter is a compact, highly integrated device which features
state-of-the-art controls, including practical diagnostics functions. The compact starter
ensures improved efficiency and reliability in the control cabinet.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 61
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
Versions
The 3RA6 compact starter is available in the following versions:
Version Figure
Compact starter direct-on-line version
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
62 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 63
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
SIRIUS Innovations
64 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
Function modules are used to perform various control jobs on automatic production lines and
for processing machines. They are suited to all time-delayed switching operations in control,
starting, protection, and regulation circuits, and ensure a high degree of repeat accuracy for
delay times, once they have been set.
Function modules are divided into those with a communication connection (AS-Interface or
IO-Link) and those without a communication connection.
Communication-capable 3RA27 function modules are available for the following contactors
and contactor assemblies:
● For direct-on-line start
● For reversing start
● For star-delta (wye-delta) start
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 65
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
1.7.5.1 SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors
SIRIUS Innovations
66 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
Assembly
With 3RA28 function modules, a starter can be easily assembled by combining individual
modules together or by using pre-assembled combinations.
Reversing start
Star-delta (wye-delta)
start
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 67
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
1.7.5.2 SIRIUS 3RA27 function modules for connection to the automation level
SIRIUS Innovations
68 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
Assembly
With the 3RA27 function modules, feeder functions are realized with contactors and a
connection is established with the control. This connection is realized via IO-Link or AS-i
(3RA2712) or via parallel wiring (3RA28).
Reversing start
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 69
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
Device combinations
The combination matrix below shows which devices can be combined for the main circuit:
x Screw-type terminals
s Spring-loaded terminals
o Ring cable lug connection system
Mechanical connection with link module
Direct mechanical connection
Figure 1-32 Device combinations
SIRIUS Innovations
70 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
Link modules
Link modules can be used to easily assemble feeders from individual devices. The table
below shows the different combination options for devices with screw-type and spring-loaded
connection systems:
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 71
System overview
1.8 Mounting and disassembly
Screw mounting
SIRIUS switching devices can be screwed onto a level surface.
Push-in lugs are required in order to fasten the 3RV2 motor starter protectors with screws.
Snap-on mounting
SIRIUS Innovations products in sizes S00 and S0 are snapped onto 35 mm DIN rails
according to DIN EN 60 715, without tools.
The tables below describe how to snap a component onto a DIN rail, using a contactor (size
S00) as an example. The procedure is the same for all SIRIUS switching devices.
SIRIUS Innovations
72 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.8 Mounting and disassembly
Refer to the relevant product chapters, product manuals, or operating instructions for specific
details of how to snap the different devices onto DIN rails.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 73
System overview
1.9 Connection
1.9 Connection
Screw connection
Within each device size, the terminals are identical. The current which the various devices of
a particular size are able to switch is also the same. This means that the same tool, torque,
and conductor cross-section is used when working on all SIRIUS Innovations products of the
same size. The stripped lengths are identical too; this is important for pre-assembled cables.
Size S00 and S0 devices feature screw-type terminals with captive screws and terminal
washers. The screw-type terminals also allow for the connection of 2 conductors with
different cross-sections.
WARNING
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
Use the following tool to establish the connection: The screws are designed for a size PZ 2
Pozidriv screwdriver at rated currents of up to 40 A.
SIRIUS Innovations
74 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.9 Connection
Spring-loaded connection
Spring-loaded connection systems are found consistently on all SIRIUS Innovations
products. They make wiring quick and maintenance-free, while also meeting high demands
in terms of vibration and shock resistance.
D
① Solid
② Finely stranded
③ Stranded
④ Finely stranded with end sleeve
a Spring-loaded terminal
b Busbar
Figure 1-33 Spring-loaded terminal
The spring-loaded terminal on the switching devices clamps copper conductors from 0.25
mm2 (removable terminal) to 10 mm2 (main circuit terminal, size S0). For more details, see
the information about conductor cross-sections in the chapter titled "Conductor cross-
sections for spring-loaded connection systems (Page 82)". The conductors can be clamped
directly or you can pre-treat them to add a form of splice protection. This could involve
attaching end sleeves or pin cable lugs to the ends of the conductors; the tidiest solution is to
use conductors whose ends have been sealed by means of ultrasound.
The devices are equipped with a two-wire connection, i.e. two independent connections per
current path. Just one conductor is connected to each clamping point. The spring-loaded
terminal presses the conductor against the busbar, which curves around inside the terminal.
The high contact pressure per unit area achieved in this way is gas-tight. The spring-loaded
terminal presses flat against the conductor, but does not damage it. The spring force of the
spring-loaded terminal has been dimensioned such that the clamping force adjusts to the
conductor diameter automatically. This ensures that any conductor deformation caused by
settling, creepage, or yielding is compensated for. The clamping point cannot become loose
of its own accord. This connection is vibration- and shock-proof. Vibrations or shocks will not
damage the conductor, nor will they cause contact separation. These terminals are
particularly well suited for use with machines and systems which are subject to stresses
such as these, e.g. vibrators, rail vehicles, and elevators.
The contact pressure between the conductor and the busbar is set to an optimum level, so
this clamp connection is appropriate for high-voltage applications, as well as for transferring
voltages and currents in the mV or mA range within instrumentation and electronic
components.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 75
System overview
1.9 Connection
Catalog (LV1) offers a standard screwdriver, which can be used as the operating tool for
opening the spring-loaded connections.
The table below describes the procedure for creating a spring-loaded connection:
WARNING
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
NOTICE
Damage to the spring-loaded terminal!
If you insert the screwdriver into the central opening on the spring-loaded terminal, this
could damage the terminal.
Do not insert the screwdriver into the central opening on the spring-loaded terminal.
SIRIUS Innovations
76 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.9 Connection
Link modules
Link modules enable load feeders to be assembled without tools, simply by plugging the
relevant devices in.
$
A Link module
① Slot for link modules
② Slot for conductor connection
③ Screwdriver opening for mounting/disassembly without a link module
Figure 1-34 Link module
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 77
System overview
1.9 Connection
Insulating stop
With conductor cross-sections which are ≤ 1 mm2, you should use an insulating stop to
prevent the conductor insulation from being clamped. The insulating stop can be used with
the following devices:
Table 1- 25 Overview table - Use of insulating stop for conductor cross-sections ≤ 1 mm2
SIRIUS Innovations
78 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.9 Connection
WARNING
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
Conductor cross-sections
Due to SIRIUS being a modular system, the conductor cross-sections of all the devices of
one size are identical.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 79
System overview
1.9 Connection
SIRIUS Innovations
80 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.9 Connection
Removable terminal
Tool Pozidriv size PZ 2, Ø 6 mm
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 81
System overview
1.9 Connection
Finely stranded without end 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm² 0.5 to 2.5 mm²
sleeve
Finely stranded with end 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm² 0.5 to 2.5 mm²
sleeve (DIN 46228 Part 1)
Finely stranded without end 2 x (1.0 to 6.0) mm² 1.0 to 6.0 mm²
sleeve
Finely stranded with end 2 x (1.0 to 6.0) mm² 1.0 to 6.0 mm²
sleeve (DIN 46228 Part 1)
SIRIUS Innovations
82 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.9 Connection
Finely stranded without end 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm²
sleeve
Finely stranded with end 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm²
sleeve (DIN 46228 Part 1)
Removable terminal
Tool Ø 3.0 x 0.5 (3RA2808-1A)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 83
System overview
1.9 Connection
Table 1- 35 Main conductors and auxiliary conductors of size S0 with M4 combination screws
SIRIUS devices
Tool Pozidriv size 2,
Ø 5 to 6 mm
Tightening torque 2.0 to 2.5 Nm
Ring cable lug 1) d2 = min. 4.3 mm
d 2 d3
d3 = max. 12.2 mm
1) The following ring cable lugs are approved for achieving the required clearances and creepage distances:
● For applications according to IEC 60947-1:
– DIN 46237 (with insulating sleeve)
– JIS CS805 type RAV (with insulating sleeve)
– JIS CS805 type RAP (with insulating sleeve)
● For applications according to UL 508:
– DIN 46 234 (without insulating sleeve)
– DIN 46225 (without insulating sleeve)
– JIS CS805 (without insulating sleeve)
A shrink-on sleeve must be used to insulate ring cable lugs without an insulating sleeve. The following
conditions must be met:
● Application temperature: -55 °C to +155 °C
● UL 224 approved
● Flame-protected
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Only use approved ring cable lugs to meet the required clearances and creepage
distances.
SIRIUS Innovations
84 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.9 Connection
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 85
System overview
1.10 Connection to the higher-level control
&RQWURO
66
3 5 2 ) ,% 8 6 3 5 2 ) ,1 ( 7
,($6L $6L (76ZLWK ( 7 6
/LQN SRZHU ,2/LQN
31,2 VXSSO\XQLW PDVWHU
6 6 6 3 n
6 ,5 ,8 6
5 $
1 Data is collected via AS-i if the devices are not all mounted together in the same place.
2 A point-to-point connection is established via IO-Link if a number of signals are grouped together.
3 Classic wiring via digital I/Os is used if the number of signals is manageable.
Figure 1-38 Options for connection to the automation level
SIRIUS Innovations
86 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.10 Connection to the higher-level control
3RLQWWRSRLQWFRQQHFWLRQ &ODVVLFDOZLULQJ
P u n kt-zu-P u n kt V erb in d u n g K lassisch e V erd rah tu n g
(76ZLWK
E T 200S m it :LULQJV\VWHP
V erd rah tu n g ssystem E T 200S
,2/LQNPDVWHU
IO -Link M aster
6 6 6 3 n
6ZLWFKLQJ 6,5,86
S chalt- S chalt-
GHYLFHV 6ZLWFKLQJ
geräte
6,5,86
gerä te
GHYLFHV
S IR IU S S IR IU S
K 20 )LHOG
F eld -
GLVWULEXWRU
verteiler
6HQVRUV
S ensoren A$FWXDWRUV
ktoren A$FWXDWRUV
ktoren S6HQVRUV
ensoren
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 87
System overview
1.10 Connection to the higher-level control
SIRIUS switching devices are connected to the automation level via AS-Interface or IO-Link,
without any additional wiring. These interfaces ensure that information about the switch
position and the readiness of the feeder for operation is transferred, and that contactor
control is implemented. In addition to these three items of information relating to feeders, IO-
Link also transfers diagnostics data.
5HDG\
$FWXDWLRQ
)HHGEDFNRI
VZLWFKLQJVWDWXV
SPS
'LDJQRVWLFV SPS
SIRIUS 3RA27 function modules or SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters can communicate with a
higher-level control either via the AS-i fieldbus or via the IO-Link wiring system. Cyclic data
transmission (DIs and DOs) is identical for both IO-Link and AS-i.
SIRIUS Innovations
88 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.10 Connection to the higher-level control
1.10.2 IO-Link
IO-Link is a new communication standard for sensors and actuators - defined by the
PROFIBUS User Organization (PNO). The IO-Link technology is based on a point-to-point
connection of the sensors and actuators to the control. Therefore, this technology is not a
bus system, but an enhanced version of a classic point-to-point connection. In addition to the
cyclic operating data, comprehensive parameters and diagnostics data are transferred for
the connected sensors and actuators. The same 3-wire connecting cable as currently used
for standard sensors is used.
IO-Link is:
● An open and standardized system for transmitting device-specific data.
● An intelligent wiring system positioned between conventional wiring and fieldbus systems.
● A system which offers advantages in the control cabinet and is integrated in the TIA
concept.
IO-Link is thus an intelligent wiring system which is fully integrated in TIA.
1.10.2.1 Overview
Compatibility of IO-Link
IO-Link guarantees compatibility between standard modules and those with IO-Link
capability as follows:
● IO-Link sensors/actuators can generally be operated on IO-Link modules (master) and on
standard I/O modules.
● Both IO-Link sensors/actuators and current standard sensors/actuators can be used on
IO-Link modules (master).
● If conventional components are used in the IO-Link system, naturally only the standard
functions are available in this case.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 89
System overview
1.10 Connection to the higher-level control
Analog signals
One further advantage of the IO-Link technology is that analog signals are digitized directly
in the IO-Link sensor and are then transmitted digitally via IO-Link communication. This
prevents any interference and eliminates the need for cable shielding.
Integration in STEP 7
Integration of the device configuration into the STEP 7 environment ensures:
● Simple and fast engineering.
● Consistent data storage.
● Fast location and clearance of faults.
This raises productivity across all phases of the system lifecycle − configuration,
commissioning, and operation. With the Siemens IO-Link solution, even sensors/actuators
and switching devices below the fieldbus level are optimally integrated with their complete
performance capability in the Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) environment.
1.10.2.2 Benefits
Benefits
The IO-link system offers important benefits when connecting complex (intelligent)
sensors/actuators:
● Dynamic modification of the sensor and actuator parameters directly via the PLC.
● Possibility of device replacement during operation without a programming device/PC, by
means of re-parameterization via the consistent storage of parameters.
● Fast commissioning due to central data storage.
● Integrated diagnostics information as far as the sensor and actuator levels.
● Uniform and significantly reduced wiring of different sensors/actuators/switching devices.
● Fewer parameterization tools.
● Integrated communication: transmission of process data and service data between
sensors/actuators and the control.
● Uniform and transparent configuration and programming by means of a parameterization
tool (Port Configurator Tool, PCT) integrated into SIMATIC STEP 7.
● Transparent representation of all parameter and diagnostics data.
● Reduced costs during configuration and commissioning.
● Alarms and indicators for preventive maintenance.
SIRIUS Innovations
90 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.10 Connection to the higher-level control
1.10.2.3 Applications
Applications
IO-Link can be used in the following applications:
● Simple connection of complex sensors/actuators with a large number of parameters to
the control.
● Optimum replacement of IO-Link modules for sensor/actuator boxes when connecting
binary sensors.
In both cases, all diagnostics data is transmitted to the higher-level control via IO-Link.
Parameter settings can be changed during operation. A sensor/actuator can be replaced
without a programming device/PC thanks to the central data storage feature.
The IO-Link range comprises:
● IO-Link master
● IO-Link module K20
● IO-Link starting controls
● IO-Link switching controls
● IO-Link sensors
$XWRPDWLRQVWUXFWXUHZLWKRXW,2/LQN $XWRPDWLRQVWUXFWXUHZLWK,2/LQN
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
3 5 2 ) ,1 ( 7 ,2 3 5 2 ) ,1 ( 7 ,2
3 5 2 ) ,% 8 6 3 5 2 ) ,% 8 6
'LVWULEXWHG 'LVWULEXWHG
,2 ,2
6ZLWFKLQJGHYLFHJURXSV
3UR[LPLW\VZLWFK 6ZLWFKLQJGHYLFHV
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 91
System overview
1.10 Connection to the higher-level control
SIRIUS Innovations
92 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.10 Connection to the higher-level control
The figure below uses an example to show where the SIRIUS 4SI electronic module is
positioned within the SIRIUS controls.
DS1e-x
SF
ICU24
PWR
CON
6ES7 138- 6ES7 131- 6ES7 131- 6ES7 138- 6ES7 138-
4CA01-0AA0 4BD01-0AA0 4BD01-0AA0 4CA01-0AA0 4GA50-0AB0
6ES7 151-
1AA05-0AB0
P15S23-A0 P15S23-A0
1
3
6SL3 244-
0SA00-1AA1
P15S27-01
3RK1 903-
0AA00
ICU15
3RK1 903-
3EA10
3RK1 301-0AB10-0AA4
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 2U 4V 6W
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 93
System overview
1.10 Connection to the higher-level control
1.10.3 AS-Interface
1.10.3.1 Overview
The AS-Interface is an open, international standard in accordance with EN 50295 and
IEC 62026-2 for process communication and field communication. Leading manufacturers of
actuators and sensors worldwide support AS-Interface. The electrical and mechanical
specifications of the AS-Interface Association are disclosed to interested companies.
AS-Interface is a single master system. For the Siemens automation systems, there are
communications processors (CPs) and routers (links), which control the process or field
communication as masters, as well as actuators and sensors, which are addressed as AS-
Interface slaves.
Laptop
Point
IWLAN Access
Notebook RCoax Cable Point
Numeric
Control
PC/PG/IPC
Coupler
Link
PROFIBUS PA
Access
Motion Control Point
Systems
Power Power
supply supply
LOGO! Controller
SINAMICS Drives
Sensors
G_IK10_XX_20002
KNX AS-Interface
Compact Compact
starter feeder
Sensors
Slaves Slaves
Signalling column
SIRIUS Innovations
94 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.10 Connection to the higher-level control
1.10.3.2 Benefits
An important characteristic of the AS-Interface technology is the use of a shared two-wire
cable for data transmission and distribution of auxiliary power to the sensors and actuators.
An AS-Interface power supply unit, which satisfies the requirements of the AS-Interface
transmission method, is used to distribute the auxiliary power. The AS-Interface cable is
mechanically coded, which prevents polarity reversal during wiring, and the insulation
displacement method allows for easy contacting.
Complex control cable wiring in the control cabinet and terminal blocks are replaced with AS-
Interface. Thanks to a specially developed cable and the insulation displacement method,
the AS-Interface cable can be connected anywhere. This concept is extremely flexible and
enables you to make huge savings.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 95
System overview
1.10 Connection to the higher-level control
6,0$7,&
2QH$6L0DVWHULV
6,027,21 FRQQHFWHGIRUHDFK$6L
QHWZRUN
352),1(7
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
352),%86'3
'3$6L)/LQN $6,QWHUIDFHPDVWHU
$6,QWHUIDFHPDVWHU
'3$6L/,1.$GYDQFHG 6
6
'3$6,QWHUIDFH/LQN(
$6,QWHUIDFH
SRZHUVXSSO\ 6,027,21&
$6,QWHUIDFHGLVWULEXWRU $6,QWHUIDFH
$6,QWHUIDFH
ZLWKRXW$6,QWHUIDFHFKLS 5HSHDWHU SRZHUVXSSO\
9'&
/2*2 SRZHUVXSSO\
0D[$6LFDEOHOHQJWK $6,QWHUIDFHGLVWULEXWRU
SHUVHJPHQW ZLWKRXW$6,QWHUIDFHFKLS
PZLWKRXWH[WHQVLRQSOXJ
PZLWKH[WHQVLRQSOXJ
0D[$6LFDEOHOHQJWK
SHUVHJPHQW
+DQGKHOG
PZLWKRXWH[WHQVLRQSOXJ
RSHUDWRUSDQHO ,2PRGXOH
PZLWKH[WHQVLRQSOXJ
'LJLWDODQDORJ
6HFXUHVODYH
ZLWK(0(5*(1&<
6723 ORDGIHHGHU5$ZLWK
IXQFWLRQPRGXOHIRU$6,QWHUIDFH
5$FRPSDFWVWDUWHU
6LJQDO ZLWK
HYDOXDWLRQ $6LPRXQWLQJPRGXOH
*B,.B;;BE
$6LH[WHQVLRQSOXJ
IRUVHJPHQWOHQJWK
XSWRP
6DIHW\
PRQLWRU
SIRIUS Innovations
96 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.10 Connection to the higher-level control
6,0$7,&6
&3
&33
6,027,21&
&33
6,0$7,&6
&3
$6,QWHUIDFH/LQNV
'3$6L/,1.$GYDQFHG
'3$6,QWHUIDFH/LQN(
'3$6L)/LQN
352),%86 $6,QWHUIDFH
,($6L/,1.31,2
352),1(7
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW $6,QWHUIDFH
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 97
System overview
1.10 Connection to the higher-level control
Feature Specification
Standard EN 50295/IEC 61158
Topology Line topology, star topology, or tree topology
(same as electrical installation)
Transmission medium Unshielded twisted pair (2 x 1.5 mm2) for data
and auxiliary power
Connection system Contacting of the AS-Interface cable using
insulation displacement
Maximum cable length 100 m without repeater
200 m with extension plug
300 m with 2 repeaters connected in series
600 m with extension plugs and 2 repeaters
connected in parallel
With parallel connection, more repeaters allow for
longer cable lengths
Maximum cycle time 5 ms for maximum configuration with standard
addresses
10 ms for maximum configuration with A/B
addresses
Profile-specific for Spec 3.0 slaves
Number of stations per AS-Interface segment 31 slaves in accordance with AS-Interface Spec.
V2.0
62 slaves (A/B method) in accordance with AS-
Interface Spec. V2.1 and V3.0, integrated analog
value transmission
Number of binary sensors/actuators Max. 124 DI/124 DO acc. to Spec. V2.0
Max. 248 DI/186 DO acc. to Spec. V2.1
Max. 496 DI/496 DO acc. to Spec. V3.0
Access method Cyclic polling master/slave procedure, cyclic data
acceptance by host (PLC, PC)
Error control Identification and resending of faulty messages
SIRIUS Innovations
98 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.10 Connection to the higher-level control
More information
Always observe the conditions and constraints for use and the additional information
available for the modules referred to above.
Internet
More information can be found on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805888/130000).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 99
System overview
1.10 Connection to the higher-level control
SIRIUS Innovations
100 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies 2
2.1 Standards
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 101
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.1 Standards
Reference
The standards from Catalog LV 1 "Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution SIRIUS -
SENTRON - SIVACON" in the appendix always apply. You will find extracts from the most
important standards relating to the innovations of the SIRIUS modular system in the chapter
titled System Overview, under Standards (Page 23).
Definition
In order for the "protective separation" of circuits to be achieved, an individual fault must not
be able to trigger a voltage overspill from one circuit into another. The kinds of fault to be
taken into account include twisted or loose conductive parts, twisted solder pins, broken
winding wires, missing screws, or broken barriers within a device.
Regulations
"Protective separation" between circuits within equipment is achieved by complying with the
basic requirements contained in standard IEC 61140
(replaces DIN VDE 0106 Part 101/IEC 536, among other standards).
Basic requirements include, for example:
● Double or reinforced insulation
● Electrically protective shielding
● Combination of double or reinforced insulation and electrically protective shielding
The insulation must be resistant to aging for the duration of the expected service life.
Circuits without a safety extra low voltage or a functional extra low voltage do not require
protective separation.
Reference
More information ... Can be found in the chapter titled ...
About "protective separation" Technical data (Page 227)
SIRIUS Innovations
102 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.1 Standards
Positively driven contact elements for contactor relays acc. to EN 60947-5-1, Annex L
According to EN 60947-5-1:1997+A12: 1999+A1:1999+A2:2000, Annnex L, positively driven
contact elements are a combination of "n" NO contacts and "m" NC contacts, which are
designed such that they cannot be closed simultaneously. "Positively driven operation" may
only apply to auxiliary switch elements which are contained in switching devices and whose
actuating forces are generated internally. An example of such elements are the SIRIUS
3RH2 contactor relays.
All SIRIUS 3RH2 contactor relays (with at least 1 NC contact) are tested to EN 60947-5-1
and have featured positively driven contact elements in the basic device or in the basic
device in conjunction with auxiliary switches ever since the product was launched.
Figure 2-1 Symbol for positively driven contact elements in a switching device
All SIRIUS 3RT2 motor contactors (with at least 1 NC contact) are tested to EN 60947-4-1
and have featured mirror contact characteristics in conjunction with auxiliary switches ever
since the product was launched.
Note
Both contact characteristics, the positively driven contact element in the contactor relay as
well as the mirror contact in the power contactor, meet the same technical requirements.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 103
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.2 Product description
Size 3RH2 contactor 3RT2 power contactors 3RA23 reversing contactor 3RA24 contactor assembly for
relays assembly star-delta (wye-delta) start
S00
S0 ---
SIRIUS Innovations
104 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.2 Product description
Reference
Versions
Connection systems
The contactor relays can be supplied with the connection systems detailed below.
Connection system Contactor relay for Contactor relay with extended Coupling relay for switching
switching in the auxiliary operating range auxiliary circuits
circuit
Screw connection ✓ ✓ ✓
Spring-loaded connection ✓ ✓ ✓
Ring cable lug connection ✓ --- ---
Solder pin connection (only ✓ ✓ ✓
possible in conjunction with
the "solder pin adapter"
optional accessory)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 105
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.2 Product description
The illustrations below show example equipment features of the 3RH2 contactor relays for
switching in the auxiliary circuit.
5+
12 1& 1& 12
12 1& 1& 12
5+
SIRIUS Innovations
106 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.2 Product description
Versions
Table 2- 5 Versions of the 3RT2 power contactors
Feature Specifications
Version Power contactor Power contactor Coupling relay for 3RT23 power 3RT25 power
for switching with extended switching contactor for contactor with
electrical loads operating range electrical loads switching resistive 2 NO contacts
loads and 2 NC contacts
Number of poles 3 3 3 4 2 NO contacts +
2 NC contacts
Number of S00 1 NO contact or 1 NO contact or 1 NO contact or --- ---
integrated 1 NC contact 1 NC contact 1 NC contact
auxiliary S0 1 NO contact and 1 NO contact and 1 NO contact and 1 NO contact and 1 NO contact and
contacts 1 NC contact 1 NC contact 1 NC contact 1 NC contact 1 NC contact
Size S00/S0
Width 45 mm
Connection systems
The power contactors can be supplied with the connection systems detailed below:
Connection Power contactor for Power contactor with Coupling relay for 3RT23 power contactor
system switching electrical extended operating switching electrical for switching resistive
loads range loads loads/3RT25 power
contactor with 2 NO
contacts and 2 NC
contacts
Screw connection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Spring-loaded ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
connection
Ring cable lug ✓ --- --- ---
connection
Solder pin ✓ ✓ ✓ ---
connection (only (size S00 only) (size S00 only) (size S00 only)
possible in
conjunction with
the "solder pin
adapter" optional
accessory)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 107
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.2 Product description
The illustrations below show example equipment features of the 3RT2 power contactors for
switching motorized loads.
/ / / 12 $
SIRIUS Innovations
108 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.2 Product description
/ / /
1 Cable duct
2 Coil terminal on the front
3 Location hole for 1-, 2-, and 4-pole auxiliary switch blocks
4 Location hole for surge suppression (underneath flap)
5 Contactor's main circuit terminal to the load/motor connection (T1, T2, T3)
6 Labeling plate
7 Openings for voltage tap of the main circuit (communication-capable power contactor only)
8 2 integrated auxiliary contacts
9 Contactor's main circuit terminal to the power network (L1, L2, L3)
Figure 2-6 3RT202.-.....-.... power contactor, size S0, overview
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 109
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.2 Product description
The fully wired and tested reversing contactor assemblies consist of 2 contactors of the
same power rating, each with an NC contact, in the basic device, link modules, and wiring
modules. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked (NC contact interlock).
The contactor assemblies for reversing are climate-proof. They are safe to touch according
to DIN EN 61140.
Connection systems
The fully wired 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly is available either with a screw-type
connection system or a spring-loaded connection system.
The illustrations below show the fully assembled reversing contactor assemblies, in the
version with the screw-type connection system.
Table 2- 7 Illustrations of the 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly (size S00 and S0)
3RA23 reversing contactor assembly, screw connection, 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly, screw connection,
size S00 size S0
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
110 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.2 Product description
The fully wired 3RA24 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start can be ordered
with the following plug-on function modules:
● Without a communication connection.
● With a communication connection.
Connection systems
The fully wired 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start can be supplied
either with a screw-type connection system or a spring-loaded connection system.
The illustrations below show the fully assembled contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-
delta) start without a communication connection, in the version with the screw-type
connection system.
Table 2- 8 Illustrations of the 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start (sizes S00 and S0)
3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start, 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start,
screw connection, size S00 screw connection, size S0
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 111
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.2 Product description
Reference
More information ... Can be found in the chapter titled ...
About the fully wired 3RA24 contactor assembly Starting three-phase motors with reduced starting
for star-delta (wye-delta) start current peaks (3RA24 contactor assembly for
star-delta (wye-delta) start) (Page 135)
About the components for customers to assemble Assembly kit for contactor assemblies for star-
their own contactor assemblies for star-delta delta (wye-delta) start (Page 218)
(wye-delta) start
Drive options
The following drive types are available for 3RH2 contactor relays and 3RT2 power
contactors:
SIRIUS Innovations
112 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.2 Product description
2.2.3 Applications
Utilization categories
According to DIN EN 60947-4-1, the application area of and the load applied to power
contactors can be identified by looking at the specified utilization category in conjunction with
the specified rated operational current or the motor power and the rated voltage. The table
below lists the most important utilization categories for contactors.
Utilization categories
AC Main circuit contacts: Utilization category for AC voltages
AC-1 Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces
AC-2 Slip-ring motors: starting, switching off
AC-3 Squirrel-cage motors: starting, switching-off motors during running
AC-4 Squirrel-cage motors: starting, plugging, inching
AC-5a Switching of discharge lamp controls
AC-5b Switching of incandescent lamps
AC-6a Switching of transformers
AC-6b Switching of capacitor banks
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 113
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.2 Product description
SIRIUS Innovations
114 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.3 Product combinations
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 115
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
2.4 Configuration
Switching resistive Contactors for switching resistive loads (utilization category AC-1)
loads • 3RT20 3-pole power contactors
• 3RT23 4-pole power contactors (4 NO contacts)
• 3RT25 4-pole power contactors (2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts)
Changing the polarity Changing the polarity of hoisting gear motors or switching two separate loads.
of hoisting gear motors • 3RT25 4-pole contactors (2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts)
Switching in the Switching devices for control and auxiliary circuits (utilization
auxiliary circuit categories AC-12/AC-15/AC-14/DC-12/DC-13).
• 3RH21 4-pole contactor relays
• 3RH22 8-pole contactor relays
Contactors with Contactors with UC Contactors of size S0 for switching electrical loads in the main circuit with
extended operating drive a wide voltage range and extended operating range.
range • 3RT202: 3-pole motor contactors (3RT202.-.N…)
Contactors for Contactors for switching electrical loads in the main and control circuits
railway applications with extended operating and temperature ranges, e.g. for railway
applications or for use in rolling mills (special versions of contactor range
3RT20/3RH21).
• 3RT2 3-pole power contactors
• 3RH2 4-pole contactor relays
• 3RT2 3-pole coupling relays
• 3RH2 4-pole auxiliary coupling relays
Coupling relays The coupling relays are tailored to the special requirements of working
with electronic controls (extended operating range and reduced coil
power). Different versions are available for main and control circuits
(special versions of contactor range 3RT20/3RH21).
• 3RT20 3-pole coupling relays
• 3RH21 4-pole auxiliary coupling relays
SIRIUS Innovations
116 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Starting three-phase Contactor assembly for reducing the starting current and starting torque when starting three-
motors with reduced phase motors.
starting current peaks • 3RA24 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start
(3RA24 contactor
assembly for star-delta
(wye-delta) start)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 117
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Ambient temperature
The 3RH2 contactor relays are dimensioned for operation at ambient temperatures of
between -25 °C and +60 °C. The devices can be stored at temperatures within the range
from -55 °C to +80 °C.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
118 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Ambient temperature
The 3RT2 contactors are dimensioned as standard for operation at ambient temperatures of
between -25 °C and +60 °C. Up to 60 °C, side-by-side mounting can be used without any
restriction. The devices can be stored at temperatures within the range from
-55 °C to +80 °C.
Size S00 and S0 contactors can be used at higher ambient temperatures, but various
constraints must be considered. The 3RT20 contactors can be operated continuously at an
ambient temperature of Ta > 60 °C, taking the following points into account:
Thermal load capacity of the main current paths
The standard contactors are dimensioned for a maximum ambient temperature of
Ta = 60 °C. In order to use the contactors at higher ambient temperatures of up to 70 °C, the
rated operational current Ie/AC-1 or Ie/DC-1 and the switching frequency z must be reduced.
The following linear dependencies can be applied here:
r& r&
,H PD[7X ,H$& ವ 7X , H PD[7X ,H'& ವ 7X
r&
] ] ವ 7X
PD[7X
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 119
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Service life
Using the contactors at higher ambient temperatures places a greater stress on molded
parts, main current paths, and the mechanism. This reduces the mechanical durability and
shortens the service life of the contactors. The service life is primarily influenced by the ON
period. The table below shows the reduced mechanical durability and shortened service life
values:
The specifications for the service life apply to an ON period of 100%. At an ON period
of 50%, the values double.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
120 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Ambient temperature
When operating contactors for railway applications (versions of the 3RT20 power contactors
and 3RH21 contactor relays) at the full magnet coil operating range, the permissible ambient
temperature is between -40 °C and +70 °C.
Note
Continuous operation at temperatures > +60 °C reduces the mechanical durability, the
current carrying capacity of the current paths, and the switching frequency.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 121
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Table 2- 10 Installation altitude for 3RT2 contactors and 3RH2 contactor relays
SIRIUS Innovations
122 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Applications
3RT20 3-pole motor contactors can be used to switch three-phase motors. These contactors
feature 3 NO contacts as their main contacts.
Versions
The entire performance range of 3 to 18.5 kW/400 V (utilization category AC-3) is covered by
two sizes, S00 and S0, each with a width of 45 mm. The contactors of sizes S00 and S0 are
equipped with AC or DC magnet systems. Contactors of size S0 can also be supplied in a
UC drive version. The device floor areas are the same for all drive types. In size S0, the
installation depth for contactors with DC and UC magnet systems is 10 mm larger than that
for versions with an AC magnet system.
Rated powers
A single size covers several versions with different standard motor ratings. The specified
power (in kW) refers to the output power on the motor shaft (in accordance with the motor's
nameplate). The performance range of the 3RT20 3-pole power contactors in size S00
extends up to 7.5 kW at a voltage of 400 V. In size S0, the maximum power value is 18.5 kW
at a voltage of 400 V. All specified rated powers and rated currents refer to an ambient
temperature of 60 °C.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 123
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Applications
The following contactor versions can be used to switch resistive loads:
3RT20 contactors with 3 NO contacts 3RT23 contactors with 4 NO contacts 3RT25 contactors with 2 NO contacts +
2 NC contacts
• Switching resistive loads (3-pole). • Switching resistive loads (4-pole). • Switching 2 separate 2-pole loads.
• For inductive loads as contactors • Isolation of systems with
which conduct the current, but do ungrounded or poorly grounded Note:
not have to perform switching neutral conductors.
(e.g. if used in the vicinity of 3RT25 contactors are not suitable for
• System transfers if alternative AC
frequency converters). power supplies are present. switching a load between 2 current
sources.
• For inductive loads as contactors
which conduct the current, but do
not have to perform switching. (For
example if used in the vicinity of
frequency converters).
• Switching mixed loads in
distribution systems (e.g. to supply
heaters, lamps, motors, PC power
supply units) with a cos ϕ value
> 0.8 according to IEC 60947-4-1
test conditions for utilization
category AC-1.
Versions
The entire performance range of 18 to 50 A/up to 690 V (utilization category AC-1) is
covered by two sizes, S00 and S0, each with a width of 45 mm. All 3-pole 3RT20 contactors
and 4-pole 3RT23/3RT25 contactors of sizes S00 and S0 are equipped with AC or DC
magnet systems. The device floor areas are the same for all drive types. In size S0, the
installation depth for contactors with a DC magnet system is 10 mm larger than that for
versions with an AC magnet system.
Rated powers
A single size covers several versions with different rated operational currents Ie.
The performance range of the 3-pole 3RT20 power contactors is exactly the same as that of
the 4-pole 3RT23 power contactors with 4 NO contacts. In size S00, the range extends up to
22 A at a voltage of up to 690 V. In size S0, the maximum current value is 50 A at a voltage
of up to 690 V.
The performance range of the 4-pole 3RT25 power contactors with 2 NO contacts and 2 NC
contacts in size S00 extends up to 22 A at a voltage of up to 690 V. In size S0, the maximum
current value is 40 A at a voltage of up to 690 V.
All specified rated powers and rated currents refer to an ambient temperature of 40 °C.
SIRIUS Innovations
124 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Applications
The 4-pole 3RT25 contactors (2 NO contacts and 2 NC contacts) can be used for changing
the polarity of hoisting gear motors.
Note
The individual device for pole changing is not suitable for reversing operation.
Versions
The entire performance range of 3 to 11 kW/400 V (utilization category AC-3) is covered by
two sizes, S00 and S0, each with a width of 45 mm. The contactors of sizes S00 and S0 are
equipped with AC or DC magnet systems.
Rated powers
A single size covers several versions with different standard motor ratings. The specified
power (in kW) refers to the power output at the motor shaft (in accordance with the
nameplate). The performance range of the 3RT25 4-pole power contactors in size S00
extends up to 5.5 kW at a voltage of 400 V. In size S0, the maximum power value is 11 kW
at a voltage of 400 V. All specified rated powers and rated currents refer to an ambient
temperature of 60 °C.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 125
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Applications
The 3RH2 contactor relays can be used for switching in the auxiliary circuit (controlling,
signaling, interlocking).
Contactor relays must meet particular requirements by featuring clear terminal designations
and time- and cost-saving connection systems; the SIRIUS 3RH2 contactor relays (size S00)
fulfill all these demands.
Thanks to their high contact reliability at low voltages and currents, the 3RH2 contactor
relays are suitable for solid-state circuits down to a lower limit of 1 mA at 17 V.
Versions
3RH2 contactor relays are available in size S00 and can be ordered with AC or DC drives.
The external design of the 4-pole 3RH21 contactor relay is identical to that of the motor
contactor in size S00 (45 mm width). In addition, 8-pole 3RH22 contactor relays can be
supplied with a permanently mounted auxiliary switch block on the front.
Rated powers
The performance range of the 4-pole 3RH21 contactor relays in size S00 extends up to 10 A
at a voltage of up to 230 V in utilization category AC-15/AC-14 and up to 6 A at 24 V DC in
utilization category DC-12/DC-13.
SIRIUS Innovations
126 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
2.4.8.1 Overview
Contactors with an extended operating range are available for certain applications. The table
below shows the different contactor versions and their key design features.
Rated powers
The various contactor versions with an extended operating range have the following rated
powers (with the exception of the coupling relays). For the 3RH21 contact relay versions the
performance range extends up to 10 A at a voltage of 230 V. For the 3RT20 motor contactor
versions the maximum power values are 5.5 kW (size S00) and 18.5 kW (size S0) at a
voltage of 400 V.
The performance range of the 3RH21 coupling relays for switching auxiliary circuits is the
same as that of the 3RH21 contactor relays. The performance range of the 3RT20 coupling
relays in size S00 extends up to 5.5 kW at a voltage of 400 V. In size S0, the maximum
power value is 15 kW at a voltage of 400 V.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 127
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Reference
Note
According to DIN EN 50005, these versions of contactor relays and motor contactors can be
expanded by means of a 4-pole auxiliary switch block on the front Two lateral auxiliary
switch blocks can also be mounted on the motor contactor.
Mounting instruction
Motor contactors and contactor relays of size S00 are approved for side-by-side mounting at
ambient temperatures of up to 70 °C.
SIRIUS Innovations
128 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Note
Auxiliary switch blocks are fitted on contactors with an electronic drive in the same way as on
basic versions.
Mounting instruction
These contactor versions of size S0 are approved for side-by-side mounting at ambient
temperatures of up to 70 °C.
Note
Coupling relays for railway applications cannot be expanded by means of auxiliary switch
blocks.
Mounting instruction
A clearance of 10 mm must be observed when using side-by-side mounting at an ambient
temperature > 60 °C < 70 °C.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 129
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Applications
The coupling relays (24 V DC magnet coil) have been adapted to the specific demands
associated with system-compatible interaction with electronic controls, thanks to their
extended operating range and reduced coil power.
These are versions of the 3RT20/3RH21 contactor ranges, which are characterized by the
following features:
Note
The 3RT20/3RH21 coupling relays cannot be expanded by means of auxiliary switch blocks.
SIRIUS Innovations
130 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
8
[8 V [8 V
[8 V 8 V
9
9
9 [8 V
9
8 V
9
9
[8 V 9
[8 V 9
[8 V 8 V
[8 V
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 131
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Applications
The 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly is used to operate a motor in two directions of
rotation. The starting characteristics correspond to those of a direct-on-line starter. When
used in conjunction with the relevant protective devices, they facilitate the space-saving and
compact assembly of fused and fuseless feeders.
On combinations with AC operation, 50/60 Hz, a changeover delay of 50 ms must be
provided at voltages ≥ 500 V. At voltages ≥ 400 V, a changeover delay of 30 ms is
recommended. These idle times do not apply to combinations with DC operation.
Versions
The 3RA23 reversing contactor assemblies are available with a uniform performance range
of 3 kW to 18.5 kW (utilization category AC-3). The 3RA23 reversing contactor assemblies
are 90 mm wide.
The diagram below shows the fully mounted 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly size S0
with a screw-type connection system.
Figure 2-8 Reversing contactor assembly with screw-type connection system (size S0)
Reference
Rated powers
The performance range of the 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly in size S00 extends up
to 7.5 kW at a voltage of 400 V. In size S0, the maximum power value is 18.5 kW at a
voltage of 400 V.
SIRIUS Innovations
132 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Table 2- 12 Auxiliary switch combination options for the 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly
S00/S0 1 0 2 0
2 2 0 2
F0
Q11 1 3 5 Q12 1 3 5
2 4 6 2 4 6
F1
U1 V1 W1
M
3~
F3
Figure 2-9 Main circuit of the reversing contactor assembly (sizes S00 and S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 133
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Table 2- 13 Control circuit of the reversing contactor assembly (sizes S00 and S0)
L1(L+) F3 L1(L+) F3
95 95
F2 F2
96 96
S0
1 0 2
S2 S1 S2
53 53
S1 Q11 S2 Q12
54 54
22 22 22 22
Q12 Q11 Q12 Q11
21 21 21 21
A1 A1 A1 A1
Q11 Q12 Q11 Q12
A2 A2 A2 A2
N(L-) N(L-)
Table 2- 14 Legend - Control circuit of the reversing contactor assembly (sizes S00 and S0)
Abbreviation Explanation
S0 "OFF" button
S1 "ON - Clockwise rotation" button
S2 "ON - Counterclockwise rotation" button
S "Clockwise - Off - Counterclockwise" selector switch
Q11 Clockwise rotation contactor
Q12 Counterclockwise rotation contactor
F1 Fuses for main circuit
F2 Overload relay
F3 Fuses for control circuit
SIRIUS Innovations
134 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
2.4.10 Starting three-phase motors with reduced starting current peaks (3RA24
contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start)
Applications
The 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start is used for starting three-
phase motors where current peaks need to be reduced and a low load torque is required
during startup. With this circuit type, the motor's starting current is reduced by 1/3
(proportional load torque) compared with direct startup.
NOTICE
When switching over from star to delta operation, the motor may be subjected to
compensation processes (fueled by an unfavorable line frequency/rotor field constellation),
which would result in higher current peaks than would be the case if the stationary motor
were connected directly in the delta circuit. However, the preferred wiring for the
3RA24 contactor assembly minimizes this effect.
The 3RA24 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start described below have been
dimensioned for standard applications.
Note
Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start for special applications, such as very
heavy starting or star-delta (wye-delta) startup of special motors, must be customized. When
dimensioning combinations for special applications such as these you can obtain support
from Technical Assistance (www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance).
Versions
The 3RA24 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start are available with a uniform
performance range of 5.5 kW to 22 kW (utilization category AC-3). The 3RA24 contactor
assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start is 135 mm wide.
The fully wired and tested 3RA24 contactor assemblies consist of three 3RT20 motor
contactors (line contactor, star contactor, and delta contactor), the 3RA2816-0EW20 function
module for star-delta (wye-delta) start which can be plugged on to the contactors (without a
communication connection), and main circuit wiring modules.
The SIRIUS modular system offers 3RA27 function modules for connection to the
automation level; they are fitted with terminals for connection to AS-Interface or IO-Link.
Note
If the 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start is to be connected to a
control, the delivery will include a contactor with a communication interface.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 135
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
The function module replaces all the wiring in the control circuit and can be used in the
voltage range from 24 to 240 V AC/DC. The changeover delay of 50 ms (timing relay
functionality) is already integrated in the star-delta (wye-delta) function module.
The illustration below shows the 3RA24 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start
without a communication connection in size S0 with a screw-type connection system:
Figure 2-10 Contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with screw-type connection system
without a communication connection (size S0)
Rated powers
The performance range of the 3RA24 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start in
size S00 extends up to 11 kW at a voltage of 400 V. In size S0, the maximum power value
is 22 kW at a voltage of 400 V.
Note
With the 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start the auxiliary switches
integrated in the contactor can still be used. Additional auxiliary switch blocks cannot be
fitted with the function modules attached.
Switching over
The switchover from star (wye) to delta cannot be carried out until the motor has been fully
accelerated to the rated speed. The necessary changeover delay and interlock are
integrated in the contactor assembly; drives which require this switchover to be performed
earlier are not suitable for star-delta (wye-delta) start.
SIRIUS Innovations
136 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Using a favorable method of connection for the main circuit will reduce the equalizing
currents and current peaks which occur when switching over from a star to a delta circuit.
/ / / / / /
8 9 : 8 9 :
8 9 : 8 9 :
/
8 /ಫ1
/ಫ /ಫ
8 //
8 // 8 /ಫ1 ˂8
1
/ /
/ಫ
1 Rotating field
2 Rotor's overtravel during the current-free phase
Figure 2-12 Phasor diagram for star-delta switchover during clockwise rotation with motor phases
connected correctly
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 137
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
During the current-free changeover delay, the rotor overtravels the rotating field. Its magnetic
field induces a decaying residual voltage, entered here in the voltage phasor diagram for
phase L1: UL1’-N.
On switching to delta (see diagrams above), the stator winding which is conducting this
residual voltage is connected to the line voltage UL1-L3. Thanks to the favorable vector
position of the residual voltage UL1’-N and the line voltage UL1-L3, which are roughly rectified,
the differential voltage ΔU is relatively low. As a result, the current peak generated by this
voltage will also remain low.
/ / /
8 9 :
8 9 :
The remanent and decaying residual voltage becomes effective in the stator once more. The
phase winding with phasor UL1’-N is now connected to the line phase UL1-L2 on switching to
delta. However, these two voltages have totally different vectorial directions; differential
voltage ΔU is high and produces a correspondingly high switchover current peak.
A switchover from star to delta results in the phasor diagram below.
/
8 /ಫ1
/ಫ /ಫ
8 //
8 /ಫ1 8 //
1 ˂8
/ /
/ಫ
1 Rotating field
2 Rotor's overtravel during the current-free phase
Figure 2-14 Phasor diagram for motor phase connections made according to the previous diagram
results in a high switchover current peak
SIRIUS Innovations
138 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
NOTICE
In order to set the motor to counterclockwise rotation, it is not simply a case of swapping
over two phases at any location. This would result in the same conditions as those
described for clockwise rotation.
The wiring must be performed as follows in order to keep the switchover current peak which
occurs on switching from star (wye) to delta as low as possible here too:
/ / / / / /
8 9 :
8 9 :
8 9 :
8 9 :
Figure 2-15 Correct connection of motor phases for counterclockwise motor rotation
Note
If two phases are swapped over in the network in order to change the direction of rotation,
the circuit is automatically changed/reversed from the most favorable to the least favorable.
Note
See the main and control circuit wiring designs below; these depict the circuit diagrams for
contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start with clockwise and counterclockwise
rotation according to the preferred wiring.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 139
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Main circuit
The diagram below shows the preferred main circuit wiring for a star-delta circuit, clockwise
and counterclockwise rotation.
///
&&:URWDWLRQ &:URWDWLRQ
: :
/99/ /88/
9 9
/88/ 0 /99/
/::/ 8 8 /::/
ɫa
Figure 2-16 Main circuit of the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start
Control circuit
The diagram below shows the control circuit for the main circuit depicted above.
//
/LQH /LQH
<
&&: &:
7
'HOWD
&&:
<
'HOWD
&:
Figure 2-17 Control circuit of the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start
SIRIUS Innovations
140 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Switching on
Due to the voltage drop in long control cables, the control voltage applied to the contactor
may fall below the threshold value at which the contactor switches on. This affects both DC-
and AC-operated contactors.
The following counter-measures can be taken:
● Changed circuit topology to allow for the application of shorter control cables.
● Increased conductor cross-section.
● Increased control voltage.
● Use of a contactor whose magnet coil has a lower closing power.
Note
A maximum cable voltage drop of uSL = 5% is permitted for SIRIUS contactors.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 141
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
&DEOHOHQJWK>P@
6ZLWFKRQSRZHU>9$@
SIRIUS Innovations
142 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
0D[LPXPFDEOHOHQJWKZLWKDFWLYDWLRQRI'&RSHUDWHGFRQWDFWRUV
P
&DEOHOHQJWK>P@
:
6ZLWFKRQSRZHU>:@
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 143
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
Switching off
During the switch-off of AC-operated contactors, the contactor may no longer switch off in
case of control circuit interruption due to an excessive line capacity of the control cable.
The following counter-measures can be taken:
● Changed circuit topology to allow for the application of shorter control cables.
● Application of DC-operated contactors.
● Reduced control voltage.
● Application of a contactor whose magnet coil has a higher holding power.
● Parallel connection of an ohmic resistance for increased holding power.
( & &
( &
SIRIUS Innovations
144 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
0D[LPXPFDEOHOHQJWK>P@LQWKHFDVHRIGLVFRQQHFWLRQYLD
SXVKEXWWRQVZLWFKFRQWURORQ$&+]RSHUDWHGFRQWDFWRUV
&DEOHOHQJWK>P@
1 24 V
2 42 V
3 110 V
4 230 V
5 400 V
Figure 2-20 Graphical representation, switch-off
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 145
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.4 Configuration
0D[LPXPFDEOHOHQJWK>P@LQWKHFDVHRIGLVFRQQHFWLRQYLD
FRQWLQXRXVDFWXDWLRQRQ$&+]RSHUDWHGFRQWDFWRUV
&DEOHOHQJWK>P@
P
9$ +ROGLQJSRZHU>9$@
1 24 V
2 42 V
3 110 V
4 230 V
5 400 V
Figure 2-21 Graphical representation, switch-off - Example
SIRIUS Innovations
146 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.5 Mounting
2.5 Mounting
2.5.1 Mounting
Mounting options
The following mounting types are available for contactors in sizes S00 and S0:
● Snapping onto a 35 mm DIN rail according to DIN EN 60715.
● Screwing onto a mounting plate
Note
A lateral distance from grounded parts of over 6 mm must be observed.
Vertical mounting
A special version of the 3RH2 contactor relays and 3RT2 power contactors is required for
vertical mounting. This special version can be requested from Technical Assistance
(www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 147
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.5 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
148 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.5 Mounting
Note
Carefully remove the nameplate before you replace the magnet coil.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 149
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.5 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
150 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.5 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 151
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.6 Connection
2.6 Connection
Connection systems
The SIRIUS contactors are available with the following connection types:
● Screw-type connection system
● Spring-loaded connection system
● Ring cable lug connection system
● Solder pin connection (only possible for size S00, in conjunction with a solder pin
adapter)
Terminal designations
Terminal Designation
A1 Coil terminal +
A2 Coil terminal -
L1, L2, L3 Contactor's main circuit terminal to the power network
T1, T2, T3 Contactor's main circuit terminal to the load/motor connection
13, 14 Auxiliary contact, closing
21, 22 Auxiliary contact, opening
Coil terminals
Size S00 and S0 contactors feature a coil terminal on the front. An adapter
(3RT2926-4R./. coil terminal module) can be used to move the coil terminal up or down on
size S0 contactors (compatible with 3RT102).
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
152 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.6 Connection
Reference
2-conductor connection
2 conductor ends can be connected to every main, auxiliary, and control circuit connection.
These connections are also suitable for untreated conductors, which may have varying
cross-sections. This connection system offers numerous benefits, including laying the
foundations for problem-free looping through and parallel connection without intermediate
terminals.
Conductor cross-sections
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 153
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7 Accessories
Table 2- 22 Overview - Accessories for 3RT2 power contactors and 3RH2 contactor relays
SIRIUS Innovations
154 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 155
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
156 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 157
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
1 Contactor size S0
2 Laterally mountable auxiliary switch block (right or left), 2-pole
3 Auxiliary switch block for snapping onto the front, 1-pole (cable entry from above or below)
4 Auxiliary switch block for snapping onto the front, 4-pole
5 Auxiliary switch block for snapping onto the front, 2-pole (cable entry from above or below)
6 Surge suppressor
7 Function module for AS-Interface, direct-on-line start
8 3RA28 function modules
9 Function module for IO-Link, direct-on-line start
10 Pneumatic delay block
11 Mechanical latch
SIRIUS Innovations
158 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 159
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.2.1 Description
Function
The 3RH21 contactor relays and 3RT2 power contactors in size S00 feature an integrated
auxiliary contact. The 3RT2 power contactors in size S0 have two integrated auxiliary
contacts. Attachable auxiliary switch blocks can be used to add up to four further contacts to
the auxiliary contacts already integrated in the basic devices.
The 3RT2 power contactors can be expanded by means of auxiliary switch blocks mounted
on the front or laterally. Only auxiliary switch blocks for mounting on the front can be
attached to the 3RH21 contactor relays.
The table below depicts the auxiliary switch blocks for mounting on the front, which can be
used across the board for contactors of sizes S00 and S0.
SIRIUS Innovations
160 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
The table below depicts the size-specific auxiliary switch blocks for lateral mounting.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 161
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Travel diagrams
The travel diagrams below for auxiliary switches in sizes S00 and S0 apply to standard
auxiliary switches and to leading/lagging contacts.
6WDQGDUG 1& RQ
DX[LOLDU\VZLWFK
RII
RQ
12 RII
1& RQ
2YHUODSSLQJ RII
DX[LOLDU\VZLWFK
OHDGLQJODJJLQJ RQ
12 RII
Figure 2-25 Travel diagrams for auxiliary switches (sizes S00 and S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
162 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.2.2 Configuration
Note
A maximum of four NC contacts is possible (from integrated and laterally mounted auxiliary
switch blocks combined).
For 3RT23 and 3RT25 contactors in size S0, auxiliary switches can only be fitted by means
of a lateral auxiliary switch block (on the left or right side).
The tables below show the maximum number of auxiliary switch blocks which can be
mounted on 3RT2 power contactors/3RH2 contactor relays and the available combination
options according to the applicable standard.
S00 1 NO contact 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
or 1 NC 2 0 1 0 0 1 0
contact
3 0 0 21) 0 0 1 right
S0 1 NO contact 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
and 1 NC 2 0 1 0 0 1 0
contact
3 0 0 21) 0 0 1 right
1) 1 left + 1 right
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 163
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
S00 2 NO contacts 1 1 0 1 1 0
and 2 NC 2 0 1 0 1 0
contacts or
3 NO contacts 3 0 0 22) 1 0
and 1 NC
contact or
4 NO contacts
1) Lateral auxiliary contacts without positively driven operation
2) 1 left + 1 right
Applicable standards
The auxiliary switch blocks can be fitted according to the following standards:
● DIN EN 50005: Definition of terminal designations; however, the order of the terminal
designations and the positions of the contacts can be determined by the user.
● DIN EN 50011 for contactor relays: Defined order for terminal designations and position
of contacts.
● DIN EN 50012 for power contactors: Defined order for terminal designations and position
of contacts.
Note
Standard DIN EN 50012 is no longer valid, but is still used.
SIRIUS Innovations
164 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Switching devices with a fixed number of auxiliary contacts (NO or NC contacts) may have a
two-digit identification number assigned to them. The first digit specifies the number of NO
contacts, the second the number of NC contacts. No rules have been defined as regards the
order of NO and NC contacts in the contactor/contactor relay.
Note
The identification numbers on the auxiliary switch blocks only apply to the attached auxiliary
switches.
RII RQ
&RQWDFWRU
1& RQ
RII
6WDQGDUG
DX[LOLDU\ RII RQ
12
VZLWFK
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 165
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Reference
2.7.2.3 Mounting/Disassembly
The procedures for mounting and disassembling auxiliary switch blocks for mounting on the
front and laterally are described below.
Mounting the 2-/4-pole auxiliary switch block on the front (size S00)
SIRIUS Innovations
166 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Disassembling the auxiliary switch on the front - 2-/4-pole auxiliary switch block (size S00)
Note
The procedure for mounting/disassembling the 1-pole auxiliary switch block on the front is
the same.
Note
The laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks according to DIN EN 50012 can only be used
if no 2-pole or 4-pole auxiliary switch blocks are snapped onto the front.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 167
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
168 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.3.1 Description
When contactor coils are disconnected, overvoltages occur (inductive loads). Voltage peaks
of up to 4 kV can occur at a rate of rise of voltage of 1 kV/microsecond (shower discharges).
This leads to:
● Substantial erosion and, as a result, premature wear of the contacts which switch the coil.
● Injection of interfering signals, which lead to fault signals in electronic controls.
Types of attenuation
The following RC circuit elements are commonly used for overvoltage attenuation; they are
connected in parallel with the contactor coil:
● RC element (resistor and capacitor in series)
● Freewheel diode, diode combination
● Varistors
All 3RT2 contactors and 3RH21 contactor relays can be subsequently connected to RC
elements or varistors for attenuating coil switching overvoltages. Diodes or diode
combinations (of suppression diodes and Zener diodes for short disconnecting times) can
also be used.
Coupling relays, on the other hand, do not require any additional surge suppressor and can
be used directly with electronic controls.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 169
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
The following surge suppressors are available for the 3RT2/3RH21 contactors:
2.7.3.2 Configuration
Selection aid
The table below compares the effects of the different surge suppressors and specifies the
applications to which they are most suited.
SIRIUS Innovations
170 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 171
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
8 6S
8 6S >9@
W >˩V@
Oscillogram of the disconnection of a contactor relay coil; the coil does not have an RC
circuit: Shower discharges are clearly visible (voltage peaks up to around 4 kV). Once the
disconnection process has started, the shower discharges occur for about 250 μs; after that,
the vibration is simply damped.
SIRIUS Innovations
172 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Note
Varistors extend the contactor's OFF time by around 2 to 5 ms.
8 6S
8 6S >9@
W >˩V@
Voltage peaks still occur. They are truncated at around 400 V and do not last as long overall
(approximately 50 μs).
Note
Oscillogram is truncated; voltage drops to zero after around 3 ms.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 173
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Note
RC elements which have been selected correctly only have a minor influence on the
contactors' switching times - OFF-delay of under 1 ms.
8 6S
8 6S >9@
W >PV@
The capacitor reduces the amplitude and the rate of rise of the switching overvoltage.
Shower discharges no longer occur. The voltage briefly jumps to 400 V and then decreases
gradually. This is the ideal type of attenuation. RC elements are suitable for AC and DC
operation. Only a minimal OFF-delay arises (of under 1 ms).
Disadvantage: The component is larger and more expensive than other options.
SIRIUS Innovations
174 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Note
However, diodes do cause the switch-off delay (the OFF time) to become 6 to 9 times
longer. This characteristic can be turned to the user's advantage if short-time voltage dips in
the range of a few milliseconds need to be bridged, for example. From a technical point of
view, it only makes sense to use freewheel diodes up to a power of 5.5 kW. For higher
power ratings we recommend an RC circuit with a diode combination.
8 6S
8 6S >9@
9
W >˩V@
Advantage: No overvoltages occur during the switch-off process. The diode blocks at 0.6 V.
Disadvantage: The diode can only be used for DC operation. The contactor's break time is
extended considerably, amounting to 6 to 9 times the switch-off delay. This longer break time
can be used for control purposes if required, e.g. to bridge short-time voltage dips.
Zener diodes (diode combination) can be used for shorter break times, which will then
equate to 2 to 6 times the switch-off delay.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 175
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Note
The use of a diode combination does, however, extend the switch-off delay (the OFF time)
by a factor of 2 to 6.
The diagram below shows the voltage characteristic for the contactor relay magnet coil with
an RC circuit from the graphic named "Disconnection of a contactor coil without RC circuit",
with an appropriate diode combination.
8 6S >9@
W >PV@
SIRIUS Innovations
176 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.3.3 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 177
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.4.1 Description
The EMC interference suppression module for size S00 contactors reduces the high-
frequency components and the voltage level of a "counter-source voltage" in three phases.
This results in the following advantages:
● Reduction of arcing:
The connection between the main current path and the EMC suppression module
enables arcing, which is responsible for contact erosion and the majority of clicking
noises, to be reduced; this in turn ensures an EMC-compliant design.
● Increased operational reliability:
Since the EMC suppression module achieves a significant reduction in radio-frequency
components and the voltage level in three phases, the contact durability is extended
considerably. This makes an important contribution towards enhancing the reliability and
availability of the system as a whole.
● Omission of fine graduation:
There is no need for fine graduations within each performance class, as smaller motors
inherently have a higher inductance, so that one solution is adequate for all fixed-speed
operating mechanisms up to 5.5 kW.
Versions
Two electrical versions of the EMC suppression module are available.
SIRIUS Innovations
178 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Circuit diagram
The diagram below shows an RC circuit with an RC element on the left, and an RC circuit
with a varistor on the right.
/
/
/
8
5B/ &B/ 9B/
8
5B/ &B/ 9B/
8
7 7 7 7 7 7
0 0
a a
2.7.4.2 Configuration
Selection aid
When motors or various inductive loads are disconnected, a counter-source voltage is
generated. This can lead to voltage peaks of up to 4,000 V with a frequency spectrum from
1 kHz to 10 MHz and a rate of voltage variation from 0.1 to 20 V/ns.
9
9
˩V W
Capacitive input to various analog and digital signals makes it necessary to suppress
interference in the load circuit.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 179
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
The EMC suppression module is available in two versions. The table below shows how the
individual versions of the EMC suppression module differ.
9
9
˩V W
RC circuit
The varistor circuit can absorb a high level of energy and can be used
for frequencies ranging from 10 to 400 Hz (controlled operating
mechanisms). There is no limiting below the knee-point voltage.
9
9
9
˩V W
Varistor circuit
SIRIUS Innovations
180 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.4.3 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 181
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.5.1 Description
The OFF-delay device prevents a contactor from dropping out unintentionally when there is a
short-time voltage dip or voltage failure. The OFF-delay device supplies a downstream, DC-
operated contactor with the necessary energy during a voltage dip, ensuring that the
contactor does not drop out. The 3RT2916-. OFF-delay devices have been specially adapted
to the 3RT contactors (sizes S00 and S0) and the 3RH21 contactor relays (size S00), and
are available in the versions shown below.
2.7.5.2 Configuration
The OFF-delay device operates without external voltage on a capacitive basis and can be
energized with either AC or DC (24 V version for DC operation only). Voltage matching is
only required for AC operation and is performed using a rectifier bridge.
A contactor opens after a delay when the capacitors integrated in the OFF-delay device are
switched in parallel to the contactor's magnet coil. In the event of voltage failures, the
capacitors discharge via the magnet coil, thus delaying opening of the contactor.
If the command devices are located upstream of the OFF-delay device in the circuit, the
device will be activated with every opening operation. If the activation takes place
downstream of the OFF-delay device, an OFF-delay only applies if the line voltage fails. The
mean OFF-delay value is around 1.5 times the specified minimum time.
2.7.5.3 Mounting
The 3RT2916-. OFF-delay devices are available with the following mounting types:
● Screwing onto a mounting plate
● Snapping onto a 35 mm DIN rail according to DIN EN 60715.
SIRIUS Innovations
182 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 183
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.6.1 Description
The mechanical latch for the 3RT2.2 power contactors ensures that the contactor remains
switched on even if there is a voltage failure. The release coil has an ON period of 100%.
2.7.6.2 Mounting/Disassembly
SIRIUS Innovations
184 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 185
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.6.3 Operation
The mechanical latch can be operated with alternating and direct current; it can be activated
and deactivated electrically and manually. The illustrations below show how to operate the
mechanical latch manually.
SIRIUS Innovations
186 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.7.1 Description
The 3RT2916-1GA additional load module for size S00 contactors is used to increase the
permissible residual current and to limit the residual voltage of SIMATIC semiconductor
outputs.
If SIRIUS contactors and SIRIUS contactor relays of size S00 are used in conjunction with
SIMATIC output modules whose residual current on signal "0" is higher than that which is
permissible for size S00 contactors, this can sometimes result in malfunctions. The
maximum permissible residual current of the electronics for size S00 contactors with a
230 V AC drive is 3 mA; at higher residual currents the contactors will not drop out. The
additional load module is used to ensure that size S00 contactors which are directly
controlled via 230 V AC semiconductor outputs are disconnected safely by programmable
logic controllers. The additional load module also performs the function of an overvoltage
attenuation circuit.
Technical data
2.7.7.2 Mounting
The 3RT2916-1GA additional load module is connected in parallel with the contactor coil. Its
design is identical to that of the surge suppressor and it is attached to the front of the
contactor, with or without an auxiliary switch block.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 187
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.8.1 Description
The 3RT2916-4MC00 control kit is a tool used for operating (closing) the auxiliary contacts of
the 3RT201 power contactors (size S00) manually during commissioning (load-free
switching). The module is used to check the wiring and the motor direction of rotation under
conditions of short-circuit protection.
2.7.8.2 Mounting
CAUTION
Disconnect the contactor from the power supply before you attach or remove the control kit.
Only use the control kit for test purposes during commissioning.
SIRIUS Innovations
188 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.9.1 Description
Thanks to a low control power (< 0.5 W) and an operating range of 17 to 30 V DC, the
3RH2924-1GP11 coupling link enables a size S0 contactor with a 24 V DC drive to be
connected directly to the PLC output. The control voltage for the coupling link and the rated
control supply voltage for the contactor are galvanically isolated. An LED indicates the
switching state of the coupling link. The 3RH2924-1GP11 coupling link features an
integrated surge suppressor (varistor) for the contactor coil being switched.
Scope of supply
The following components ship with the 3RH2924-1GP11 coupling link:
● Coupling link
● 3RT2926-4RA11 coil terminal module with coil terminal from above (screw-type
connection system)
Circuit diagram
3RH2924-1GP11 coupling link for control from the PLC.
% 1
8
$
$
1 Coupling link
2 Contactor
B1+/B2- Control voltage 24 V DC
L1/N Rated control supply voltage for the selected contactor
Figure 2-34 Coupling link, circuit diagram (size S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 189
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.9.2 Mounting
Prerequisite
The 3RT2926-4R..... coil terminal module must be mounted before you can attach the
coupling link.
CAUTION
Before mounting the coupling link, disconnect the voltage from L1 to L3.
SIRIUS Innovations
190 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.10.1 Description
The LED display indicator module can be connected to the coil terminals of size S00 and S0
contactors; it indicates the energized state of the contactors via yellow LEDs. In practice the
LED display indicator module is primarily used for 3RT2 power contactors in size S0.
The LED display module can be used for voltages of 24 to 240 V AC/DC. The LEDs are
switched on a bidirectional basis in order to ensure they are protected against polarity
reversal. With AC control both LEDs light up and with DC control just one LED lights up,
depending on the polarity.
2.7.10.2 Mounting
The LED display indicator module is snapped into the location hole on the front of the
contactor, in place of the labeling plate.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 191
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.11.1 Description
The solder pin adapter can be used to solder standard contactors in size S00 up to
5.5 kW/12 A onto PCBs.
SIRIUS Innovations
192 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.11.2 Mounting
Mounting on a contactor of size S00 with an attached 4-pole auxiliary switch block
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 193
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.12.1 Description
The 3RT2926-4R. coil terminal module for mounting on 3RT20 power contactors in size S0
serves as an adapter for the coil and ensures the coil wiring is correct for 3RT102 contactors
(e.g. for retrofitting a 3RT10 device).
The coil terminal module is available in the following versions.
SIRIUS Innovations
194 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.12.2 Mounting
Below is an example of how to mount the 3RT2926-4RA11 coil terminal module (coil
terminal from above) onto a 3RT2 power contactor of size S0.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 195
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.13.1 Description
For the version with a ring cable lug connection system the SIRIUS modular system features
attachable cover caps for ensuring touch protection (finger safety) according to IEC 61140.
Both line-side and output-side covers are available.
Figure 2-35 3RT2 power contactor with ring cable lug cover (size S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
196 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.14.1 Description
When contactors and contactor relays are used in safety-oriented applications, it must be
ensured that the contactors cannot be operated manually. A sealable
cover (3RT2916-4MA10), which prevents the contactors being unintentionally operated
manually, is available as an accessory for such applications. It is a transparent molded-
plastic cap with a clip that enables the contactor to be sealed.
2.7.14.2 Mounting
Note
Proceed in the same way to mount the sealable cover on size S0 contactors.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 197
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.15.1 Description
The 3-phase infeed terminal is used for the parallel injection of an L1 cable at L1 to L3. The
terminal is available for mounting on 3RT20 power contactors in sizes S00 and S0 with
screw-type connection systems.
2.7.15.2 Mounting
Note
Proceed in the same way to mount the 3-phase infeed terminal on 3RT20 contactors of
size S0.
SIRIUS Innovations
198 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.16.1 Description
3RT2 power contactors can be connected in parallel (e.g. neutral bridge) using parallel
switching connections.
The following versions of parallel switching connections are available:
2.7.16.2 Configuration
If the current paths of multi-pole switching devices are connected in parallel, the total current
is distributed across the individual current paths in accordance with their ohmic resistance
and their inductive interactions. The ohmic resistance is primarily generated by the contact
resistance at the contacts, the value of which can vary as a result of erosion and oxidation.
This means that the current distribution is neither even nor stable: Individual current paths
may be overloaded and the overload releases or relays will trip too early (tripping error).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 199
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
,H ,H ,H ,H ,H ,H
2.7.16.3 Mounting
The parallel switching connectors of size S00 can all be reduced by one pole. The illustration
below shows an example of how to mount the 3-pole parallel switching connector with
connection terminal to a contactor of size S00.
Table 2- 54 Mounting the 3-pole parallel switching connector with connection terminals
SIRIUS Innovations
200 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.17.1 Description
The link module for 2 contactors in series is a module used to connect two contactors in
series. It is used in Safety applications, for example, where two switching points located in
series are required.
The link module for 2 contactors in series is available in the following versions.
2.7.17.2 Mounting
Table 2- 56 Mounting the link module for 2 contactors in series (size S00)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 201
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Note
The procedure is the same for contactors of size S0.
SIRIUS Innovations
202 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.18.1 Description
Table 2- 57 Versions of the link module for motor starter protector - contactor
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 203
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.19.1 Description
In terms of its function, the pneumatic timer is comparable with solid-state time-delayed
auxiliary switch blocks. It is available for 3RT2.2 (size S0) power contactors in the following
versions.
The pneumatic delay block is used if electronic components are not desirable or in the
absence of a control supply voltage.
2.7.19.2 Mounting/Disassembly
engages.
SIRIUS Innovations
204 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Note
The pneumatic delay block is attached on the front of the contactors and its auxiliary
contacts take the form of 1 NO contact and 1 NC contact. If the pneumatic timer is mounted
on a contactor, no other auxiliary contacts are permitted.
2.7.19.3 Operation
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 205
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.20.1 Description
The insulating stop is available in the following versions.
The insulating stop is for contactors with spring-loaded connections. In the case of
conductors with a small conductor cross-section (≤ 1mm2), it ensures that the conductor
insulation is not clamped with the rest of the cable. An insulating stop unit comprises 5 pairs
of terminals which can be separated. The diagram below illustrates an example of how the
the 3RT2916-4JA02 insulating stop can be used on a size S00 basic device.
SIRIUS Innovations
206 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.21.1 Description
The terminal module for contactors with screw connections is available in the following
versions.
Table 2- 63 Versions of the terminal module for contactors with screw connections
2.7.21.2 Mounting
Table 2- 64 Mounting the terminal module for contactors (size S00) with screw connections
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 207
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Note
Proceed in the same way to mount the terminal module on size S0 contactors.
Note
Replace the contactor and the adapter together when end of service life is reached.
SIRIUS Innovations
208 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.22 3RA27 function modules for connection to the automation level (AS-Interface or
IO-Link)
2.7.22.1 Description
Special device versions of SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors (power contactors with communication
capability) which can be expanded by attaching 3RA27 function modules provide a
straightforward means of connecting SIRIUS switching devices to the automation level
(PLC).
The function modules facilitate connection to AS-Interface or IO-Link communication
solutions and are plugged into 3RT2...-....-0CC0 power contactors with communication
capability.
The function modules are available for the following contactors and contactor assemblies.
AS-Interface IO-Link
Direct-on-line start 3RA2712- . AA00 3RA2711- . AA00
Reversing start 3RA2712- . BA00 3RA2711- . BA00
Star-delta (wye-delta) start 3RA2712- . CA00 3RA2711- . CA00
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 209
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.23.1 Description
The SIRIUS modular system features 3RA28 function modules for the delayed switching of
contactors and auxiliary switches (e.g. for switching from star operation to delta operation).
3RA28 function modules are available with screw-type or spring-loaded connections in the
following versions:
● Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switches 3RA281.-..W10
With ON-delay or OFF-delay, without auxiliary voltage
● Solid-state timing relays with semiconductor output 3RA2811-.CW10 and
3RA2812-.DW10
With ON-delay or OFF-delay, with auxiliary voltage
● Star-delta (wye-delta) function module 3RA2816-0EW20
Complete module kit for star-delta (wye-delta) start
Reference
More information ... Can be found in the chapter titled...
About the different versions of the 3RA28 function SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on
modules 3RT2 contactors, under Device versions
(Page 643)
About mounting 3RA28 function modules on SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on
3RT2 contactors 3RT2 contactors, under Mounting (Page 660)
SIRIUS Innovations
210 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.24.1 Description
Users can mount the 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly using various assembly kits for
screw and spring-loaded connections.
Note
The 3RT201./3RT202. power contactors required for installing the 3RA23 reversing
contactor assembly in size S00/S0 have to be ordered separately.
Table 2- 66 Versions of the assembly kit for 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly
Electrical interlock
The assembly kit for contactors (size S00 and S0) with screw-type connections contains
wiring modules for connecting the main and control current paths.
The assembly kit for contactors (size S00) with screw-type connections contains wiring
modules for connecting the main and control current paths.
For contactors (size S0) with spring-loaded connections the kit only contains wiring modules
for connecting the main circuit. If the control circuit wiring (electrical interlock) is also
required, the auxiliary switches must be wired separately as necessary. The procedure is
described in the chapter titled Mounting (Page 211).
2.7.24.2 Mounting
The reversing contactor assemblies can be built from contactors with screw connections or
spring-loaded connections:
● Standard contactor (Q 11) for direction of rotation 1 (clockwise rotation): Left
● Standard contactor (Q 12) for direction of rotation 2 (counterclockwise rotation): Right
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 211
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
The illustration below shows example procedures for assembling the reversing contactor
assembly 3RA23 size S00 with screw-type connection. Operating instructions 1 to 5 show
how to assemble the contactors using the mechanical interlock and the connecting clips.
Assembling the reversing contactor assembly with screw-type connection - size S00
Table 2- 67 Assembling the reversing contactor assembly with screw-type connection (size S00)
SIRIUS Innovations
212 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Electrical interlock
Note
Contactors with one NC contact in the basic device (3RT201.) are required for the electrical
interlock.
Table 2- 68 Assembling the reversing contactor assembly with screw-type connection (size S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 213
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Assembling the reversing contactor assembly with spring-loaded connection - size S00
The mechanical interlock and the connecting clips are mounted in the same way as
described for size S00 with screw-type connection.
Table 2- 69 Assembling the reversing contactor assembly with spring-loaded connection (size S00)
SIRIUS Innovations
214 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Table 2- 70 Assembling the reversing contactor assembly with spring-loaded connection (size S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 215
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Table 2- 71 Mounting the 4-pole reversing contactor assembly with screw-type connection (size S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
216 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Note
As there are no wiring kits for 4-pole reversing contactor assemblies, the main and control
circuits are wired using a cable.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 217
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.25 Assembly kit for contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start
2.7.25.1 Description
Prerequisite
The following components, which have to be ordered separately, are required to mount the
contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start:
● Assembly kit for the 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start
● Function modules with or without communication connection.
● Three power contactors 3RT20
Note
If the function modules are used, they take over the tasks associated with control circuit
wiring and the timing relay. However, an installation without function modules and with an
additional external timing relay continues to be possible. Accordingly, the scope of supply of
the assembly kit includes the wiring modules for the control circuit wiring (these are not
required if function modules are being used).
Assembly kit for 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start
The assembly kit for customer assembly of the 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta
(wye-delta) start comprises the following components and is available in various versions.
Table 2- 72 Components for assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start
SIRIUS Innovations
218 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Note
If the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start is built using communication-capable
3RA27 function modules, a 3RT2...-....-0CC0 contactor with communication connection must
be used (only the basic module's contactor has to be a communication-capable contactor).
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 219
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
2.7.25.2 Mounting
The contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start can be built from contactors with
screw connections or spring-loaded connections:
● Line contactor (Q11): Left
● Delta contactor (Q13): Center
● Star contactor (Q12): Right
This arrangement applies for all installation instructions described in this chapter.
The illustration below shows example procedures for assembling the contactor assembly for
star-delta (wye-delta) start in size S0 with screw-type connection. Operating instructions 1 to
6 show how to assemble the contactors using the components supplied in the assembly kit.
Assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with screw-type connection - size
S0
Table 2- 73 Assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with screw-type
connection (size S0)
on contactor Q12.
together.
%
SIRIUS Innovations
220 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 221
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
CAUTION
Disconnect the power supply before mounting the function module for star-delta (wye-delta)
start.
Note
If you are building contactor assemblies from individual components, the function modules
take over the tasks associated with control circuit wiring and the timing relay. The wiring
modules for connecting the control current paths are not required.
SIRIUS Innovations
222 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
locking mechanism.
Note
The function modules are mounted on the contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta)
start described below as previously described.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 223
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with screw-type connection - size
S00
CAUTION
Disconnect the power supply before mounting the 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-
delta (wye-delta) start.
The mechanical interlock and the connecting clips are mounted and the function modules
are plugged in in the same way as described for size S0 with screw-type connection.
Table 2- 74 Assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with screw-type
connection (size S00)
SIRIUS Innovations
224 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with spring-loaded connection -
size S00
The mechanical interlock and the connecting clips are mounted and the function modules
are plugged in in the same way as described for size S0 with screw-type connection.
Table 2- 75 Assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with spring-loaded
connection (size S00)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 225
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.7 Accessories
Assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with spring-loaded connection -
size S0
The mechanical interlock and the connecting clips are mounted and the function modules
are plugged in in the same way as described for size S0 with screw-type connection.
Table 2- 76 Assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with spring-loaded
connection (size S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
226 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
Table 2- 77 Technical data for 3RT2 contactors - Rated data for auxiliary contacts
Type 3RT2
Size S00 S0
Rated data for auxiliary contacts
Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1/DIN EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200)
(Data applies to integrated auxiliary contacts and contacts in the
auxiliary switch blocks for contactors size S00 and S0.)
Rated insulation voltage Ui(pollution degree 3) V 690
Conventional thermal current Ith = A 10
Rated operational current Ie/AC-12
AC load
Rated operational current Ie/AC-15/AC-14
• at rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 101)
110 V A 101)
125 V A 101)
220 V A 101)
230 V A 101)
380 V A 3
400 V A 3
500 V A 2
660 V A 1
690 A 1
DC load
Rated operational current Ie/DC-12
• at rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 6
60 V A 6
110 V A 3
125 V A 2
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.3
600 V A 0.15
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 227
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RT2
Size S00 S0
Rated data for auxiliary contacts
Rated operational current Ie/DC-13
• at rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 62)
60 V A 2
110 V A 1
125 V A 1
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0.14
600 V A 0.1
Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA Frequency of contact faults <10-8 i.e. <
acc. to DIN EN 60947-5-4 1 fault per 100 million operating cycles
1) Integrated auxiliary contacts (size S0) and contacts in the auxiliary switch blocks for contactors (size S00 and S0): 6 A
2) Contacts in auxiliary switch blocks for contactors size S00 and S0:4 A
SIRIUS Innovations
228 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
0LOOLRQRSHUDWLQJF\FOHV
breaking current. ZLWK
DWWDFKDEOH
The characteristic curves apply to:
'& '&
• Integrated auxiliary contacts on 3RT20 9 9
$&$&
• Auxiliary switch blocks 3RH2911-., 3RH2921-. for
contactors size S00 and S0 '&
9
, D $
, H '& , H '& , H $& , H '&
9 9 9 9
9
9
9
$ 31 N:
;
& $
ຘ ದ
%
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 229
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
9
9
9
9
&RQWDFWRU 57 57 57 57
in operating cycles W\SH N: N: N: N:
• B: Contact service life for inching (Ia = multiple of
Ie) in operating cycles
• C: Proportion of inching operations as a
5757
percentage of all operations
bN:bbN:
,D $
,H $
31N:
SIRIUS Innovations
230 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.3 General data and short-circuit protection for 3RT201. contactors without overload relay
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 231
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
1) Contact service life for main contacts is listed in the table titled "Contact service life of auxiliary and main contacts"
2) Conductor cross-sections are listed in the table titled "Conductor cross-sections - 3RT201."
SIRIUS Innovations
232 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 233
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
234 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.5 Main circuit - 3RT201. contactors (current carrying capacity for alternating current and
direct current)
Table 2- 81 Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for alternating current (3RT201. contactors)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 235
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
236 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 237
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
238 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
Table 2- 82 Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for direct current (3RT201. contactors)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 239
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
240 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 241
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.7 General data and short-circuit protection for 3RT202. contactors without overload relay
SIRIUS Innovations
242 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
1) Contact service life for main contacts is listed in the table titled "Contact service life of auxiliary and main contacts".
2) Conductor cross-sections are listed in the table titled "Conductor cross-sections - 3RT202.".
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 243
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
244 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 245
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
246 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.9 Main circuit - 3RT202. contactors (current carrying capacity for alternating current)
Table 2- 88 Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for alternating current (3RT202. contactors)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 247
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
248 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 249
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
Type Screw connection and Screw connection and Screw connection and
spring-loaded spring-loaded spring-loaded
connection connection connection
Integrated or snap-on Integrated or snap-on Laterally
auxiliary switch block auxiliary switch block mountable
auxiliary switch block
Size S00 S0 S00/S0
CSA and UL rated data for auxiliary contacts
Rated voltage V AC 600 600 600
Switching capacity A 600, Q 600 A 600, Q 600 A 300, Q 600
• Continuous A 10 10 10
current at
240 V AC
SIRIUS Innovations
250 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.11 Main circuit - 3RT202. contactors (current carrying capacity for direct current)
Table 2- 90 Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for direct current (3RT202. contactors)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 251
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
252 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 253
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
insulating sleeve A shrink-on sleeve must be used to provide additional insulation for the ring
- JIS C2805 type R cable lugs 1).
without insulating • Application temperature: -55 °C/+155 °C
sleeve • UL 224 approved
• Flame-protected
Auxiliary conductor
Connection screw M3 (Pozidriv size PZ 2)
• Operating tool ∅ 5 ... 6
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
• Usable ring cable lugs mm d2 = min. 3.2
mm d3 = min. 7.5
- DIN 46237 with
insulating sleeve
- JIS C2805 type RAV
with insulating sleeve
- JIS C2805 type RAP
with insulating sleeve
- DIN 46234 without ≥ PP
insulating sleeve
- DIN 46225 without
1)
insulating sleeve A shrink-on sleeve must be used to provide additional insulation for the ring
- JIS C2805 type R cable lugs 1).
without insulating • Application temperature: -55 °C/+155 °C
sleeve • UL 224 approved
• Flame-protected
1) If two different conductor cross-sections are being connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must be
located in the range indicated. If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply.
SIRIUS Innovations
254 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.13 Rated data (CSA and UL) for 3RT201. and 3RT202. contactors
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 255
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
256 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
2.8.2.1 General data, short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay and
actuation (3RT231. and 3RT232. contactors)
Table 2- 95 Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay (3RT231. and 3RT232. contactors)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 257
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
258 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 259
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
2.8.2.2 Main circuit - 3RT231. and 3RT232. (current carrying capacity for alternating current
and direct current)
Table 2- 97 Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for alternating current (3RT231. and 3RT232. contactors)
Table 2- 98 Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for direct current (3RT231. and 3RT232. contactors)
SIRIUS Innovations
260 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 261
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
2.8.2.3 General data, short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay and
actuation (3RT251. and 3RT252. contactors)
Table 2- 100 Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay (3RT251. and 3RT252. contactors)
SIRIUS Innovations
262 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
2.8.2.4 Main circuit - 3RT251. and 3RT252. (current carrying capacity for alternating current
and direct current)
Table 2- 102 Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for alternating current (3RT251. and 3RT252. contactors)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 263
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
Table 2- 103 Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for direct current (3RT251. and 3RT252. contactors)
SIRIUS Innovations
264 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
Table 2- 104 Contactors with series resistor and coupling relays for railway applications
Where specifications have not been included the information and technical data for the standard contactors apply.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 265
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
Switching times
Switching on at 17 V
- ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 130
- OFF-delay NC ms 30 ... 80
At 24 V
- ON-delay NO ms 35 ... 60
- OFF-delay NC ms 25 ... 40
At 30 V
- ON-delay NO ms 25 ... 50
- OFF-delay NC ms 13 ... 30
Switching off at 17 to 30 V
- OFF-delay NO ms 70 ... 20 38 ... 65 7 ... 20
- ON-delay NC ms 20 ... 30 55 ... 75 20 ... 30
Vertical mounting position Please contact your local Siemens office for advice
SIRIUS Innovations
266 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 267
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
Table 2- 108 General data and actuation for coupling relays 3RT201.-..B4. and 3RT202.-..B4.
SIRIUS Innovations
268 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
Table 2- 109 General data and actuation (coupling relays 3RT201.-1MB4.-0KT0, 3RT201.-1VB4., 3RT201.-1WB4.)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 269
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
2.8.4.1 Permissible mounting position, positively driven operation of contacts and contact
reliability of 3RH2 contactor relays (4- and 8-pole)
Type 3RH2
Size S00
Permissible mounting position
The contactors are dimensioned for • AC and DC operation
r r r
operation on a vertical mounting plane.
Table 2- 111 Positively driven operation of contacts in the case of 3RH2 contactor relays
Type 3RH2
Size S00
Positively driven operation of contacts in the case of contactor relays
3RH2: Explanation:
Yes, in the basic device and the auxiliary switch block as well There is positively driven operation if it is ensured that the
as between the basic device and the snap-on auxiliary switch NC contact and the NO contact cannot be closed at the
block (removable) in accordance with: same time.
• ZH 1/457
• DIN EN 60947-5-1, Annex L ZH1/457
Safety rules for control units on power-operated presses
in the metalworking industry.
3RH22: DIN EN 60947-5-1, Annex L
Yes, in the basic device and the auxiliary switch block as well Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Specific
as between the basic device and the snap-on auxiliary switch requirements to be met by positively driven contacts.
block (permanently mounted) in accordance with:
• ZH 1/457
• DIN EN 60947-5-1, Annex L
SIRIUS Innovations
270 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RH2
Size S00
Contact reliability
Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA acc. to DIN EN 60947-5-4 Frequency of contact faults < 10-8, i.e. < 1 error per
100 million operating cycles
2.8.4.2 General data, rated data (CSA and UL), and data relating to short-circuit protection for
3RH2. contactor relays
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 271
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
272 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 273
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RH2.
Size S00
Actuation
Magnet coil operating range
AC operation At 50 Hz 0.8 to 1.1 x US
At 60 Hz 0.85 to 1.1 x US
DC operation At + 50 °C 0.8 to 1.1 x US
At + 60 °C 0.85 to 1.1 x US
Magnet coil power input (for cold coil and 1.0 x US)
• AC operation, 50 Hz, standard version
- Switch-on power VA/cos ϕ 37 / 0.8
- Holding power VA/cos ϕ 5.7 / 0.25
• AC operation, 60 Hz
- Switch-on power VA/cos ϕ 33 / 0.75
- Holding power VA/cos ϕ 44 / 0.25
• DC operation
- Switch-on power = holding power W 4.0
Permissible residual current of electronics (with 0 signal)
• AC operation1) mA < 4 mA (230 V/US)
• DC operation mA < 10 mA (24 V/US)
Switching times2)
Total break time = opening delay + arcing time
AC operation Values apply with coil in cold state
and at operating temperature for
operating range
• Switching on
- ON-delay NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x US ms 8 ... 33
1.0 x US ms 9 ... 22
Minimum operating time 3RH24 ms ≥ 35
- OFF-delay NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x US ms 6 ... 25
1.0 x US ms 6.5 ... 19
• Switching off
- OFF-delay NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x US ms 4 ... 15
1.0 x US ms 4.5 ... 15
Minimum operating time 3RH24 ms ≥ 30
- ON-delay NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x US ms 5 ... 15
1.0 x US ms 5 ... 15
SIRIUS Innovations
274 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RH2.
Size S00
Actuation
DC operation
• Switching on
- ON-delay NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x US ms 30 ... 100
1.0 x US ms 20 ... 50
Minimum operating time 3RH24 ms ≥ 100
- OFF-delay NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x US ms 25 ... 90
1.0 x US ms 30 ... 45
• Switching off
- OFF-delay NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x US ms 7 ... 13
1.0 x US ms 7 ... 12
Minimum operating time 3RH24 ms ≥ 30
- ON-delay NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x US ms 13 ... 19
1.0 x US ms 13 ... 18
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15
Dependency of switching frequency z’on operational current I’ and
operational voltage U’
z’ = z ⋅ Ie/I’ ⋅ (Ue/U’)1.5 ⋅ 1/h
1) The use of the additional load module 3RT2916-1GA00 is recommended at higher residual currents.
2) The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are
attenuated against voltage peaks (suppression diode 6x to 10x; diode combination 2x to 6x; varistor +2 to 5 ms).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 275
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RH2.
Size S00
Load side
Rated operational currents Ie
AC-12 A 10
AC-15/AC-14 at rated operational voltage US Up to 230 V A 10
400 V A 3
500 V A 2
680 V 1
DC-12 at rated operational voltage US
• 1 current path 24 V A 6
60 V A 6
110 V A 3
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.3
600 V A 0.15
• 2 current paths in series 24 V A 10
60 V A 10
110 V A 4
220 V A 2
440 V A 1.3
600 V A 0.65
• 3 current paths in series 24 V A 10
60 V A 10
110 V A 10
220 V A 3.6
440 V A 2.5
600 V A 1.8
DC-13 at rated operational voltage US
• 1 current path 24 V A 6
60 V A 2
110 V A 1
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0.14
600 V A 0.1
SIRIUS Innovations
276 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RH2.
Size S00
Load side
• 2 current paths in series 24 V A 10
60 V A 3.5
110 V A 1.3
220 V A 0.9
440 V A 0.2
600 V A 0.1
• 3 current paths in series 24 V A 10
60 V A 4.7
110 V A 3
220 V A 1.2
440 V A 0.5
600 V A 0.26
Switching frequency z
• in operating cycles/hour during rated operation for utilization AC-12/DC-12 h-1 1000
category
AC-15/AC-14 h-1 1000
DC-13 h-1 1000
• No-load switching frequency h-1 10000
Dependency of switching frequency z’on operational current I’
and operational voltage U’. z’ = z ⋅ Ie/I’ ⋅ (Ue/U’)1.5 ⋅ 1/h
1) Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks: 6 A.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 277
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
Table 2- 119 General data for the pneumatic delay block 3RT2926-2P.
Type 3RT2926-2P.
Pneumatic delay block1)
General data
Mechanical durability Operating 5 million
cycles
Electrical durability at Ie Operating 1 million
cycles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690
Permissible ambient temperature • Operation °C -25 … + 60
• Storage °C -50 … + 80
Rated operational currents Ie acc. to DIN EN 60947 utilization categories
• AC 12 A 10
• AC 15/AC 14 at Ue Up to 230/220 V A 6
400/380 V A 4
500 V A 2.5
690/660 V A 1.5
• DC 13 at Ue 24 V A 4
48 V A 2
110 V A 0.7
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0.15
Conductor cross-sections
• Solid, stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5)2) or 2 x (2.5 to 4)2)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5)
• AWG cables AWG 2 x (22 to 14)
• Tightening torque of connection screws Nm 0.8 … 1.1
Time delay
• Accuracy ± 10 %
CSA and UL rated data
• Rated voltage V AC 600
• Switching capacity A 600, Q 600
1) For size S0. No other auxiliary switch blocks are permitted in addition to the pneumatic delay block.
2) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must be located in
the range specified. If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply.
SIRIUS Innovations
278 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 279
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
280 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
2.8.5.3 General data - Terminal module for contactors with screw connection
Table 2- 121 Terminal module for contactors with screw connection 3RT1900-4RE01, 3RT1916-4RD01, 3RT1926-4RD01
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 281
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
282 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 283
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
2.8.5.5 General data - Control side and load side - coupling link 3RH2924-1GP11
Type 3RH2924-1GP11
Size Coupling link for mounting on contactors
acc. to IEC 60947/DIN EN 60947
General data
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 300
Protective separation between coil and contacts V AC Up to 300
acc. to DIN EN 60947-1, Annex N
Degree of protection to EN 60947-1, Annex C
• Connections IP20
• Enclosure IP40
Permissible ambient temperature
• Operation °C -25 … + 60
• Storage °C -40 … + 80
Conductor cross-section
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)
Connection screws M3
Short-circuit protection A 6
(weld-free fuse protection at Ik ≥1 kA)
fuse links, operating class gL/gG
NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE
Type 3RH2924-1GP11
Size Coupling link for mounting on contactors
acc. to IEC 60947/DIN EN 60947
Control side
Rated control supply voltage US V DC 24
Operating range V DC 17 ... 30
Power input at US W 0.5
Rated current consumption mA 20
Release voltage V ≥4
Function display Yellow LED
Surge suppressor Varistor
SIRIUS Innovations
284 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RH2924-1GP11
Size Coupling link for mounting on contactors
acc. to IEC 60947/DIN EN 60947
Load side
Mechanical durability in million 20
operating
cycles
Electrical durability at Ie in million 0.1
operating
cycles
Switching frequency Operating h-1 5000
cycles
ON time ms Approx. 7
OFF time ms Approx. 4
Bounce time ms Approx. 2
Contact material AgSnO
Switching voltage V AC/DC 24 … 250
Permissible residual current of electronics (with 0 mA 2.5
signal)
Rated operational currents1)Conventional thermal A 6
current Ith
Rated operational currents Ie acc. to DIN EN 60947 utilization
categories
AC-15
- At 24 V A 3
- At 110 V A 3
- At 230 V A 3
DC-13
- At 24 V A 1
- At 110 V A 0.2
- At 230 V A 0.1
Switching current with resistive load acc. to
DIN EN 60255 (relay standard) and DIN EN 60947
AC-12
- At 24 V A 6
- At 110 V A 6
- At 230 V A 6
DC-12
- At 24 V A 6
- At 110 V A 0.3
- At 230 V A 0.21)
1) Capacitive loads can result in micro-welding on the contacts.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 285
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.9 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Note
All dimensions are specified in mm.
3RT2.1.-1 contactors (3-pole) and 3RH21..-1 contactor relays (4-pole) in screw-type connection
system with accessories mounted
SIRIUS Innovations
286 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.9 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
3RT2.1.-2 contactors and 3RH21..-2 contactor relays (4-pole) in spring-loaded connection system
with accessories mounted
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 287
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.9 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
3RT2.1-4. contactors and 3RH21..-4 contactor relays (4-pole) with ring cable lug connection system
and accessories mounted
Figure 2-42 Latched 4-pole contactor relay 3RH24..-1 (screw-type connection system)
3RH24..(0LA0) contactor relay with extended operating range in screw-type connection system
Figure 2-43 3RH24.. contactor relay with extended operating range (screw-type connection system)
SIRIUS Innovations
288 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.9 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Figure 2-44 3RH201. and 3RH21.. contactor relays with extended operating range (spring-loaded
connection system)
Figure 2-45 Drilling plan for contactors and contactor relays (size S00)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 289
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.9 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
$&'&
$&'&
$&'&
$&'&
SIRIUS Innovations
290 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.9 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
$&'&
$&'&
$&'&
$&'&
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 291
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.9 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
3RT2.2.-4 contactors (3-pole) in ring cable lug connection system with accessories mounted
$&'&
$&'&
SIRIUS Innovations
292 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 293
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
S00 contactor, with internal diode, 1 NO S00 contactor, with internal diode, 1 NC
contact contact
3RT201.-.K..1 3RT201.-.K..2
$ / / / $ / / /
S00 contactor, with internal suppressor S00 contactor, with internal suppressor
diode, 1 NO contact diode, 1 NC contact
3RT201.-.S..1 3RT201.-.S..2
S00 contactor, with internal diode S00 contactor, with internal diode
combination, 1 NO contact combination, 1 NC contact
SIRIUS Innovations
294 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
8 8
S00 contactor, with varistor connected on S00 contactor, with varistor connected on
the front, 1 NO contact the front, 1 NC contact
3RT201.-2K..2-0LA0
(
5Y .
$
3RT231.-.A..0, 3RT231.-.B..0
$ / / / /
3RT251.-.A..0, 3RT251.-.B..0
$ 5 5
$ 5 5
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 295
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
3RT202.-.A..0, 3RT202.-.B..0
$ / / /
3RT202.-.A..4, 3RT202.-.B..4
3RT202.-.F..0
$ / / /
3RT202.-.K..0
3RT202.-.N..0, 3RT202.-.X..0
$ / / /
SIRIUS Innovations
296 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
3RT232.-.A..0, 3RT232.-.B..0
$ / / / 1
S0 contactor, 4 main current paths for switching resistive loads, 4 NO contacts plus 1 NO
contact, 1 NC contact
3RT252.-.A..0, 3RT252.-.B..0
$ 5 5
$ 5 5
$ $
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 297
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
$
$
3RH2262-.A..0, 3RH2262-.B..0,
3RH2362-.A..0, 3RH2362-.B..0
$
$
$
$
Contactor relay, with integrated diode,
2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts Contactor relay, with integrated diode, 3 NO
contacts, 1 NC contact
3RH2140-.F..0, 3RH2140-.J..0,
3RH2140-.V..0
$
$
SIRIUS Innovations
298 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
8 8
$ $
Contactor relay, with connected varistor, Contactor relay, with connected varistor, 3 NO
2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts contacts, 1 NC contact
3RH2140-.W..0
$
$
$ $
Contactor relay, with integrated suppressor Contactor relay, with integrated suppressor
diode, 2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts diode, 3 NO contacts, 1 NC contact
3RH2140-.K..0, 3RH2140-.S..0
$
$
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 299
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
3RH2122-.G..0 3RH2131-.G..0
$ $
$ $
Contactor relay, with integrated full-wave Contactor relay, with integrated full-wave
rectifier, 2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts rectifier, 3 NO contacts, 1 NC contact
3RH2140-.G..0
$
$
3RH2122-.K...-0LA00
(
5Y .
.
$
SIRIUS Innovations
300 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
( $ ( $
Latched contactor relay, without RC circuit, Latched contactor relay, without RC circuit,
2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts 3 NO contacts, 1 NC contact
3RH2440-.A..0, 3RH2440-.B..0
( $
( $
3RH2911-.DA02 3RH2921-.DA02
Auxiliary switch block, lateral, 2 NC contacts Auxiliary switch block, lateral, 2 NC contacts
Auxiliary switch block, lateral, 1 NO contact, Auxiliary switch block, lateral, 1 NO contact,
1 NC contact 1 NC contact
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 301
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
3RH2911-.DA20 3RH2921-.DA20
Auxiliary switch block, lateral, 2 NO contacts Auxiliary switch block, lateral, 2 NO contacts
Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the
front, 1-pole, 1 NC contact front, 1-pole, 1 NO contact
Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the
Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the front, 2-pole, 2 NO contacts
front, 2-pole, 2 NO contacts
3RH2911-.NF02
SIRIUS Innovations
302 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the
Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the front, 2-pole, 1 NO contact, 1 NC contact
front, 2-pole, 1 NO contact, 1 NC contact
3RH2911-.HA01 3RH2911-.HA10
Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the
front, 4-pole, 1 NC contact front, 4-pole, 1 NO contact
3RH2911-.HA02 3RH2911-.HA20
Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the
front, 4-pole, 2 NC contacts front, 4-pole, 2 NO contacts
3RH2911-.HA03 3RH2911-.HA30
Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the
front, 4-pole, 3 NC contacts front, 4-pole, 3 NO contacts
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 303
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
3RH2911-.GA04 3RH2911-.GA40
Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the
front, 4-pole, 4 NC contacts front, 4-pole, 4 NO contacts
3RH2911-.FA04 3RH2911-.FA40
Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the
front, 4-pole, 4 NC contacts front, 4-pole, 4 NO contacts
3RH2911-.GA13 3RH2911-.HA13
Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the
front, 4-pole, 1 NO contact, 3 NC contacts front, 4-pole, 1 NO contact, 3 NC contacts
3RH2911-.GA31 3RH2911-.HA31
Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the
front, 4-pole, 3 NO contacts, 1 NC contact front, 4-pole, 3 NO contacts, 1 NC contact
SIRIUS Innovations
304 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
3RH2911-.GA22 3RH2911-.HA22
Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the
front, 4-pole, 2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts front, 4-pole, 2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts
3RH2911-.FB11 3RH2911-.FC22
Auxiliary switch block, 1 x make-before- Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the
break, 1 NO contact, 1 NC contact front, 4-pole, 2 x make-before-break, 2 NO
contacts, 2 NC contacts
3RH2911-.HA12 3RH2911-.HA21
Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the
front, 4-pole, 1 NO contact, 2 NC contacts front, 4-pole, 2 NO contacts, 1 NC contact
3RH2911-.FB22
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 305
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
3RH2911-.HA11
Magnet coil
3RT2924-5A...
$
$
Surge suppressor
3RT29.6-1C... 3RT29.6-.B...
8
3RT29.6-1D... 3RT2926-1E...
SIRIUS Innovations
306 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
3RT29.6-1J... 3RT29.6-1L...
8
Surge suppressor, varistor with LED Surge suppressor, suppression diode with
LED
3RT2926-1M...
. .
. .
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 307
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
$ $
4 4
$ $
$ $
4 4
$ $
SIRIUS Innovations
308 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start with 3RA28 function modules for star-delta (wye-
delta) start
3RA241.-..F..
$ $
4 4 4
$ $
Figure 2-55 S00 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start, with 3RA28 function modules
for star-delta (wye-delta) start
3RA242.-..F..
$ 4 $
4 4
$ $
Figure 2-56 S0 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start, with 3RA28 function modules for
star-delta (wye-delta) start
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 309
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start with mounted function modules for AS-Interface
3RA241.-..H..
$ $ 4 $
4 4
$ $ $
Figure 2-57 S00 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start, with mounted function modules for AS-Interface
3RA242.-..H..
$ $ 4 $
4 4
$ $ $
Figure 2-58 S0 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start, with mounted function modules for AS-Interface
SIRIUS Innovations
310 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start with mounted function modules for IO-Link
3RA241.-..E..
$ $ 4 $
4 4
$ $ $
Figure 2-59 S00 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start, with mounted function modules for IO-Link
3RA242.-..E..
$ 4 $
4 4
$ $
Figure 2-60 S0 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start, with mounted function modules for IO-Link
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 311
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.10 Circuit diagrams
SIRIUS Innovations
312 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices 3
3.1 Safety instructions
Correct usage
NOTICE
Radio frequency interference in residential areas
This product is a Class A device. Its use in residential areas can cause radio frequency
interference.
In this case, the user can be held liable for taking additional measures to attenuate such
interference.
Safety measures
NOTICE
Inter-phase short circuit due to overvoltage on solid-state reversing contactors
In the event of a short circuit, the switching devices in the load feeder can put persons and
property at risk.
For fused configurations, the protective device has to be replaced following a short circuit.
To reduce the risk of an inter-phase short circuit due to overvoltage, we recommend
connecting a 3TX7 462-3L type varistor between L1 and L3. We recommend a fused
design with semiconductor protection to provide short-circuit protection.
NOTICE
Inter-phase short circuit with solid-state reversing contactors in automatic mode
If the primary voltage is applied at the solid-state reversing contactors at the same time as
the control voltage is switched on, the integrated RC surge suppressor may respond in
some cases. If it does, dependent on actuation, two thyristors in the reversing circuit may
activate, thereby producing an inter-phase short circuit.
To be sure of avoiding this response, once the primary voltage has been applied, a delay of
40 ms should be allowed to elapse before the control inputs are activated.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 313
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.1 Safety instructions
CAUTION
Electromagnetic interference on the solid-state reversing contactors
Star-connected three-phase motors (particularly <1 kW) with electromechanical contactors
can cause significant electromagnetic interference. Such interference can cause solid-state
reversing contactors being used in the vicinity to malfunction.
Provision should be made for appropriate EMC surge suppressors on the sources of
interference.
SIRIUS Innovations
314 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.1 Safety instructions
3.1.1 Standards
Applicable standards
The product meets the requirements of the following standards:
Applications Standard
Device standard DIN IEC 60947-4-2
Terminal designations/Terminal markings DIN EN 50011
Degree of protection IP20 DIN IEC 0529
Vibration resistance DIN IEC 60068-2-6
Shock resistance DIN IEC 60068-2-27
EMC standard DIN IEC 60947-4-2; DIN IEC 61000-4-2;
DIN IEC 61000-4-6; DIN IEC 61000-4-4;
DIN IEC 61000-4-5
Resistance to extreme climates DIN IEC 60068-2-61 (sequence of tests),
DIN IEC 60068-2-30 (damp heat),
DIN IEC 60068-2-2 (dry heat),
DIN IEC 60068-2-1 (cold),
DIN IEC 60068-2-14 (temperature change)
Reference
The standards from Catalog LV 1 "Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution SIRIUS -
SENTRON - SIVACON" in the appendix always apply. You will find extracts from the most
important standards relating to the SIRIUS modular system in the chapter titled System
overview, underStandards (Page 23).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 315
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.2 Product description
The SIRIUS modular system features single- and three-phase solid-state contactors and
solid-state relays for the frequent switching of resistive loads. Three-phase solid-state
contactors and solid-state reversing contactors are available for switching motorized loads.
Standardized function modules for various applications complete the range of SIRIUS solid-
state switching devices.
The solid-state contactor and solid-state reversing contactor versions listed in this manual
are intended specifically for operation on three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW.
You can find more detailed information in the appendix More information (Page 756).
Overview
These 2-phase controlled instantaneous switching solid-state switching devices are operated
in two mounting widths in an insulating enclosure:
● In 45 mm width
– Up to 5.2 A as solid-state contactor (motor contactor) or
– Up to 5.4 A as solid-state reversing contactor and
● In 90 mm width
– Up to 16 A as solid-state contactor or
– Up to 7.4 A as solid-state reversing contactor
This means that it is possible to operate motors up to 7.5 kW.
The solid-state contactors and solid-state reversing contactors can be connected directly to a
motor starter protector with a 3RA2921-1BA00 link module. Direct mounting of a
3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relay and, in some cases, a 3RR2 current monitoring
relay, is also possible. This provides a time-saving way of implementing rapid-switching
motor feeders with and without fuses.
SIRIUS Innovations
316 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.2 Product description
Versions
The following table provides an overview of the versions of the 3RF34 instantaneous
switching solid-state contactors for switching motors.
Feature Versions
Version Solid-state contactor Solid-state reversing contactor
Description Complete devices in insulated enclosures for Compact design of the reversing circuit for
the frequent switching on and switching off the frequent switching on and switching off of
of AC drives. AC drives with continuous reversal of the
direction of rotation
Order numbers 3RF34..-.BB.. 3RF34..-.BD..
Size S0
Width (motor power1)/max. • 45 mm (motors up to 2.2 kW, 5.2 A) • 45 mm (motors up to 2.2 kW, 5.4 A)
rated operational current) • 90 mm (motors up to 7.5 kW, 16 A) • 90 mm (motors up to 3.0 kW, 7.4 A)
Number of poles 3 3
Connection system Screw-type and spring-loaded Screw-type
Rated operational voltage Up to 600 V Up to 480 V
Rated control supply 24 V DC and 110 to 230 V AC
voltage
Switching delay
ON-delay 1 ms (24 V DC), 5 ms (110 to 230 V AC) 5 ms (24 V DC), 20 ms (110 to 230 V AC)
OFF-delay 1 ms (24 V DC), 30 ms (110 to 230 V AC) 5 ms (24 V DC), 10 ms (110 to 230 V AC)
plus up to one half-wave plus up to one half-wave
Locking time 60 to 100 ms (24 V DC), 50 to 100 ms (110 AC to 230 V)
Enclosure Insulated (no grounding required)
Control connections Screw-type connection system and spring- Screw-type connection system, removable
loaded connection system, removable terminal for auxiliary circuit wiring (3 contacts)
terminal for auxiliary circuit wiring
(2 contacts)
1) Rating data relates to 400 V line voltage
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 317
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.2 Product description
3.2.2 Applications
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
318 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.2 Product description
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 319
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.2 Product description
Solid-state contactor
SIRIUS Innovations
320 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.2 Product description
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 321
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.2 Product description
Device labels
SIRIUS
9 '&
$ $
*
(
5)%%
7 7 7
SIRIUS Innovations
322 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.2 Product description
SIRIUS
9 '&
$ $
*
(
5)%%
/ / /
9$&
$$
Figure 3-5 Labeling on solid-state contactors with AC control voltage, zoom view
9 '&
$ $
Figure 3-6 Labeling on solid-state contactors with DC control voltage, zoom view
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 323
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.2 Product description
SIRIUS
9'&
$ $ $
*
(
5)%'
7 7 7
9$&
$$$
Figure 3-8 Labeling on solid-state reversing contactors with AC control voltage, zoom view
9'&
$ $ $
Figure 3-9 Labeling on solid-state reversing contactors with DC control voltage, zoom view
SIRIUS Innovations
324 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.2 Product description
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 325
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.3 Product combinations
Reference
More information ... Can be found in...
About device combinations with solid-state The configuration guide titled "Configuring
switching devices SIRIUS Innovations - Selection data for load
feeders in fuseless and fused designs"
(order no.: 3ZX1012-0RA21-1AC0)
SIRIUS Innovations
326 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.4 Functions
3.4 Functions
Performance features
The performance of the solid-state switching devices is essentially determined by the type of
power semiconductors used and the internal design. In the case of SIRIUS solid-state
contactors and solid-state relays, only thyristors are used in place of less powerful TRIACs.
Two of the most important features of thyristors are the blocking voltage and the maximum
load integral.
Blocking voltage
Thyristors with a high blocking voltage can also be operated without difficulty in networks
with high interference voltages. Separate protective measures, such as a protective circuit
with a varistor, are not necessary in most cases.
For example, in the case of SIRIUS solid-state switching devices, thyristors with a blocking
voltage of 800 V are fitted for operation in networks up to 230 V. Thyristors with up to 1600 V
are used for networks with higher voltages.
Reference
More information ... Can be found in the chapter titled
About the performance features of solid-state Technical data (Page 350)
switching devices
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 327
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.4 Functions
Solid-state contactors
Solid-state contactors are used for the frequent switching on of motors. The switch-on
command is sent to the solid-state contactor when the control voltage is connected to
terminals A1/A2. The power semiconductors are actuated after a short dwell time has
elapsed.
SIRIUS Innovations
328 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.5 Planning/configuring
3.5 Planning/configuring
Load feeders
There is no such thing as a typical design for a load feeder with solid-state relays or solid-
state contactors. Rather, the variety of connection systems and control voltages support
universal possible applications. SIRIUS solid-state relays and solid-state contactors can be
installed in either fuseless or fused feeders.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 329
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.5 Planning/configuring
Program description
Selecting solid-state switching devices with the "Selection of solid-state contactors for
switching motors" tool
The "Selection of solid-state contactors for motors" tool provides a quick and easy way of
dimensioning solid-state switching devices correctly.
Based on the details about the motor, the load cycle, and the environmental requirements,
the switching device load is calculated and a suitable type is selected. The complete order
number then appears in the "Result" field.
The program can be accessed via the following links:
● Configurator
(https://mall.automation.siemens.com/WW/guest/bizLogic/bizGotoConfig.asp?ConfigID=4
&ConfigType=3RF2&lang=en): (Selection of solid-state contactors for motors)
● Selection of solid-state contactors for switching motors
(https://eb.automation.siemens.com/spicecad/dc-web-app/main/index.jsf)
NOTICE
Dimensioning and sizing the motor and the corresponding protection devices
The user is responsible for dimensioning and sizing the motor and the corresponding
protection devices correctly. In the case of very high switching frequencies, we recommend
the use of thermistor motor protection. The use of motor starter protectors or overload
relays for motor overload protection may not be suitable under some circumstances.
SIRIUS Innovations
330 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.5 Planning/configuring
Procedure:
Start by defining the operating mode. Select "Direct start" or "Reverse operation" to launch
the calculation process. You can then proceed as you wish. The results are recalculated
every time you make an entry. Some entries will restrict other parameters which can be
selected (this is indicated by messages in the "State" field).
If your entries result in errors, these will also be displayed in the "State" field.
Once the entries have been modified accordingly and the calculation has been completed,
the order number of a suitable device will be appear in the "Result" field. The order number
can then be copied for ordering in the Mall (http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall).
Selecting a new "Operating mode" resets the tool completely. The tool can be set to the
following languages via the "Language" button: English; German; Italian; Spanish;
Portuguese.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 331
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.5 Planning/configuring
SIRIUS Innovations
332 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.5 Planning/configuring
● Motor parameters
– "Nominal current of motor"
The "Nominal current of motor" is indicated on the motor's nameplate.
– "Operating current of motor"
This value is the current actually consumed during the operating phase; a
measurement may need to be taken in order to ascertain it. Alternatively, this value
can be estimated on the basis of the load data.
– "Starting current factor of motor"
The value has to be taken from the motor's technical data. It essentially determines
the current load of the switching device during starting.
– "Starting time"
This is the time the motor needs to complete a startup process.
● "Load cycle input"
A load cycle comprises a starting phase, an operating phase and an idle phase.
The load cycle time is the sum of these phases. There are two possible ways of entering
the load cycle.
One is to enter the operating cycles and the duty cycle, the other is to enter the operating
time and the idle time.
– "Operating cycles"
The number of load cycles in an hour; in the case of reversing contactors every load
cycle counts, regardless of counterclockwise or clockwise running.
– "Duty cycle"
Ratio of the sum of the starting time and the operating time to the total load cycle time.
– "Operating time"
Time during which the rated motor current flows.
– "Idle time"
Duration of the current-free phase.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 333
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.5 Planning/configuring
Combining 3RF34 solid-state contactors, type of coordination 1 (type 1), with 3RB3 overload relays
3RF34 solid-state contactors can be combined with the following 3RB3 overload relays in
conformance with type of coordination 1 (type 1):
Combining 3RF34 solid-state contactors, type of coordination 2 (type 2), with 3RB3 overload relays
3RF34 solid-state contactors can be combined with the following 3RB3 overload relays in
conformance with type of coordination 2 (type 2):
SIRIUS Innovations
334 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.5 Planning/configuring
Combining 3RF34 solid-state reversing contactors, type of coordination 1 (type 1), with 3RB3
overload relays
3RF34 solid-state reversing contactors can be combined with the following 3RB3 overload
relays in conformance with type of coordination 1 (type 1):
Combining 3RF34 solid-state reversing contactors, type of coordination 2 (type 2), with 3RB3
overload relays
3RF34 solid-state reversing contactors can be combined with the following 3RB3 overload
relays in conformance with type of coordination 2 (type 2):
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 335
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.5 Planning/configuring
Fuses
Fuses
3RF34 Max. size [A] Class Type Current [kA] Voltage [V]
3RF3405-.BB 25 J TD 65 480
3RF3405-.BB 45 J TD 65 600
3RF3410-.BB 45 J TD 65 480
3RF3410-.BB 45 J TD 65 600
3RF3412-.BB 45 J TD 65 480
3RF3412-.BB 50 J TD 65 600
3RF3416-.BB 50 J TD 65 480
3RF3416-.BB 50 J TD 65 600
SIRIUS Innovations
336 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.5 Planning/configuring
Fuses
3RF34 Max. size [A] Class Type Current [kA] Voltage [V]
3RF3403-.BD 45 J TD 65 480
3RF3405-.BD 45 J TD 65 480
3RF3410-.BD 45 J TD 65 480
Fuses
3RF34 Max. size [A] Type Current [kA] Voltage [V]
3RF3405-.BB 4 3RV1721 50 480
3RF3405-.BB 4 3RV1721 10 600
3RF3410-.BB 8 3RV1721 5 600
3RF3412-.BB 8 3RV1721 5 600
3RF3416-.BB 8 3RV1721 5 600
3RF3416-.BB 10 3RV1721 5 600
Fuses
3RF34 Max. size [A] Type Current [kA] Voltage [V]
3RF3403-.BD 4 3RV1721 50 480
3RF3405-.BD 5 3RV1721 30 480
3RF3410-.BD 8 3RV1721 5 480
NOTICE
Short-circuit currents
High short-circuit currents can occur when combining solid-state switching devices with
protective devices such as the 3RB3.
For standard short-circuit current ratings and where protection against high short-circuit
currents (HIC) is concerned (corresponding to type 1), when combining solid-state
switching devices and protective devices such as the 3RB3, the device with the lowest
rated value is decisive as regards short-circuit fuse protection.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 337
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.5 Planning/configuring
Semiconductor fuses
SITOR fuses can be used as an alternative to UL fuses. Here too, the relevant data has
been included in the UL reports. Protection of the semiconductors is much better when
SITOR semiconductor fuses are used (comparable with type of coordination type 2).
The following applies to UL applications:
SITOR fuses are not feeder protective devices but only "special purpose fuses".
SIRIUS Innovations
338 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.6 Application planning
Note
Running star-connected three-phase motors (particularly with power ratings < 1 kW) with
electromechanical contactors can cause significant electromagnetic interference. Such
interference, which exceeds permissible limit values, can cause solid-state switching devices
operating in the vicinity to malfunction.
In the case of high levels of electromagnetic interference we recommend equipping motors
up to 5.5 kW which are controlled using 3RT20 1 electromechanical contactors with EMC
surge suppressors. 3-phase RC interference suppression modules like the 3RT29 16-1PA1
(up to 400 V) provide the best filtering effect. Corresponding modules for the contactors are
listed in the product chapter titled "Contactors and contactor assemblies", under
"Accessories (Page 154)". Varistor interference suppression modules should not be used, as
they are not capable of filtering out rapid transients to the required extent.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 339
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.6 Application planning
SIRIUS Innovations
340 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.7 Mounting
3.7 Mounting
Mounting options
The solid-state switching devices are mounted by
● Snapping them onto a DIN rail or
● Screwing them to a base plate
Minimum clearances
!
5)
5)
!
!
!
!
!
5)
5)
!
!
!
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 341
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.7 Mounting
Mounting position
Figure 3-14 Drill hole spacing for screw mounting (dimensions in mm)
SIRIUS Innovations
342 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.7 Mounting
Screw mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 343
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.8 Connection
3.8 Connection
Connection system
All SIRIUS solid-state switching devices are characterized by the wide variety of connection
systems they support. You can choose from the following connection systems:
Reference
Terminals
Terminal Designation
L1, L2, L3 Main circuit terminals infeed/line side
T1, T2, T3 Main circuit terminals outgoing feeder motor/load side
A1∼ Control supply voltage AC operation
A2∼ Control supply voltage AC operation
A1+ Control supply voltage DC operation (plus)
A2- Control supply voltage DC operation (minus)
SIRIUS Innovations
344 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.8 Connection
Terminals
Terminal Designation
L1, L2, L3 Main circuit terminals infeed/line side
T1, T2, T3 Main circuit terminals outgoing feeder motor/load side
A1∼ Control supply voltage AC operation
A2∼ Control supply voltage AC operation, reference potential for A1/A3
A3∼ Control supply voltage AC operation
A1+ Control supply voltage DC operation (plus)
A2- Control supply voltage DC operation (minus), reference potential for A1/A3
A3+ Control supply voltage DC operation (plus)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 345
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.9 FAQs - Frequently asked questions
Troubleshooting/FAQs
Table 3- 21 Questions/Answers/Solutions
SIRIUS Innovations
346 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.10 Accessories
3.10 Accessories
3.10.2.1 Description
The 3RT2916-4JA02 insulating stop is designed for solid-state contactors with spring-loaded
connections and ensures that the conductor insulation is kept back in the case of conductor
cross-sections up to 1 mm2. An insulating stop unit comprises 5 pairs of terminals. As
illustrated below, it plugs into the spring-loaded cable entries (max. conductor cross-section
up to 2.5 mm2).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 347
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.10 Accessories
3.10.3.1 Description
Link modules to establish the electrical and mechanical connections between solid-state
contactor and motor starter protector are required if you wish to use load feeders. The link
module for attaching the 3RV2 motor starter protector attaches easily to the contactors.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
348 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.10 Accessories
3.10.3.2 Mounting/Disassembly
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 349
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
General data
Ambient temperature
Operation, derating as of 40 °C °C - 25 ... + 60
Storage °C - 55 ... + 80
Installation altitude m 0 ...1000;
at > 1,000 m seek advice from Technical Assistance
(www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance)
Shock resistance according to DIN IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 15/11
Vibration resistance; acc. to DIN IEC 60068-2-6 g 2
Degree of protection IP20
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
• Emitted interference acc. to DIN IEC 60947-4-2
- Conducted interference Class A for industrial environments1)
- Emitted high-frequency interference Class A for industrial environments
voltage
• Immunity2)
- Electrostatic discharge acc. to kV Contact discharge: 4; air discharge: 8; behavior criterion 2
DIN IEC 61000-4-2 (corresponds to
severity 3)
- Induced conducted RF fields MHz 0.15 ... 80, 140 dBμV, behavior criterion 1
acc. to DIN IEC 61000-4-6
- High-frequency, electromagnetic MHz 80 ... 3,000; test level 10 V/m; behavior criterion 1
fields acc. to DIN IEC 61000-4-3
- Burst acc. to DIN IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2/5.0 kHz; behavior criterion 1
- Surge acc. to DIN IEC 61000-4-53) kV Conductor - protective conductor 2; conductor - conductor:
1; behavior criterion 2
SIRIUS Innovations
350 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
General data
Connection type
• Solid-state contactor Screw-type and spring-loaded
• Solid-state reversing contactor Screw-type connection system
Permissible mounting position r r
r r
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 351
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
Table 3- 24 Connection of main contacts with screw-type connection system or spring-loaded connection system
Table 3- 25 Connection of main contacts and control contacts with screw-type connection system or spring-loaded
connection system
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
352 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
Table 3- 27 Connection of main contacts and control contacts with screw-type connection system
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 353
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
354 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 355
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
Reference
3.11.6 Solid-state contactors - fuseless design with CLASS 10 motor starter protector
Order no. 3RF34 05-.BB.. 3RF34 10-.BB.. 3RF34 12-.BB.. 3RF34 16-.BB..
Rated operational current IAC-531) acc. to IEC 60947-4-2
At 40 °C A 5.2 (4.5) 2) 9.2 12.5 16
UL/CSA at 50 °C A 4.6 (4.0) 2) 8.4 11.5 14
At 60 °C A 4.2 (3.5) 2 7.6 10.5 12.5
Power loss at IAC-53 at 40 °C W 10 (8) 2) 16 22 28
Short-circuit protection with type of coordination "1" at operational voltage Ue up to 440 V
Motor starter protector Type 3RV2 021-1GA10 3RV2 021-1JA10 3RV2 021-1KA10 3RV2 021-4AA10
Iq kA 50 5 5 3
1) Use overvoltage protection device; max. cut-off-voltage 6,000 V; min. energy handling capability 100 J
2) The reduced values in brackets apply in the case of a directly mounted motor starter protector combined with side-by-
side mounting.
SIRIUS Innovations
356 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 357
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
358 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
3.11.10 Solid-state reversing contactor with integration of four current paths to form a
single reversing circuit
3.11.11 Solid-state contactors - fuseless design with CLASS 10 motor starter protector
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 359
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
360 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 361
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
Ia
Ie
Ib
NSB0_01815a
ta tb
tED tp
ts
SIRIUS Innovations
362 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
,D,H ,E,H
]>K@
W('>V@
1 ta = 0.05 s
2 ta = 0.1 s
3 ta = 0.2 s
4 ta = 0.4 s
5 ta = 0.8 s
6 ta = 1.6 s
7 ta = 3.2 s
Figure 3-19 Maximum permissible switching frequency z depending on the starting time ta and the ON period tED for
motors with a starting current of 4 to 7.2 times the rated current and with full load 1)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 363
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
]>K@
W('>V@
1 ta = 0.05 s
2 ta = 0.1 s
3 ta = 0.2 s
4 ta = 0.4 s
5 ta = 0.8 s
6 ta = 1.6 s
7 ta = 3.2 s
Figure 3-20 Maximum permissible switching frequency z depending on the starting time ta and the ON period tED for
motors with a starting current of 4 to 7.2 times the rated current and 60% load 1)
1)The dashed curves apply to the high currents during operation with a motor starter
protector.
SIRIUS Innovations
364 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
,D,H ,E,H
]>K@
W('>V@
1 ta = 0.05 s
2 ta = 0.1 s
3 ta = 0.2 s
4 ta = 0.4 s
5 ta = 0.8 s
6 ta = 1.6 s
7 ta = 3.2 s
Figure 3-21 Maximum permissible switching frequency z depending on the starting time ta and the ON period tED for
motors with a starting current of up to 4 times the rated current and with full load
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 365
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
]>K@
W('>V@
1 ta = 0.05 s
2 ta = 0.1 s
3 ta = 0.2 s
4 ta = 0.4 s
5 ta = 0.8 s
6 ta = 1.6 s
7 ta = 3.2 s
Figure 3-22 Maximum permissible switching frequency z depending on the starting time ta and the ON period tED for
motors with a starting current of up to 4 times the rated current and 60% load
SIRIUS Innovations
366 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
Ia
Ie
Ib
NSB0_01815a
ta tb
tED tp
ts
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 367
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
,D,H ,E,H
]>K@
W('>V@
1 ta = 0.05 s
2 ta = 0.1 s
3 ta = 0.2 s
4 ta = 0.4 s
5 ta = 0.8 s
6 ta = 1.6 s
7 ta = 3.2 s
Figure 3-24 Maximum permissible switching frequency z depending on the starting time ta and the ON period tED for
motors with a starting current of 4 to 7.2 times the rated current and with full load
SIRIUS Innovations
368 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
]>K@
W('>V@
1 ta = 0.05 s
2 ta = 0.1 s
3 ta = 0.2 s
4 ta = 0.4 s
5 ta = 0.8 s
6 ta = 1.6 s
7 ta = 3.2 s
Figure 3-25 Maximum permissible switching frequency z depending on the starting time ta and the ON period tED for
motors with a starting current of 4 to 7.2 times the rated current and 60% load
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 369
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
,D,H ,E,H
]>K@
W('>V@
1 ta = 0.05 s
2 ta = 0.1 s
3 ta = 0.2 s
4 ta = 0.4 s
5 ta = 0.8 s
6 ta = 1.6 s
7 ta = 3.2 s
Figure 3-26 Maximum permissible switching frequency z depending on the starting time ta and the ON period tED for
motors with a starting current of up to 4 times the rated current and with full load
SIRIUS Innovations
370 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.11 Technical data
]>K@
W('>V@
1 ta = 0.05 s
2 ta = 0.1 s
3 ta = 0.2 s
4 ta = 0.4 s
5 ta = 0.8 s
6 ta = 1.6 s
7 ta = 3.2 s
Figure 3-27 Maximum permissible switching frequency z depending on the starting time ta and the ON period tED for
motors with a starting current of up to 4 times the rated current and 60% load
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 371
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.12 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Note
All dimensions are specified in mm.
Solid-state contactor
ෘ
[
ෘ
[
SIRIUS Innovations
372 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.12 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 373
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.13 Circuit diagrams
SIRIUS Innovations
374 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.13 Circuit diagrams
3RF34..-.BD2.
3RF34..-.BB0.
3RF34..-.BD0.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 375
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.13 Circuit diagrams
Example circuit diagram for the solid-state contactor for motorized loads
13(+]9
/
/ '&9
/
/
/
1
3(
)
) ) )
U
6
5 2Q
4
/ / /
$
$
7 7 7
0
0
F1 - 3 Main circuit fuses (solid-state contactor recommended)
F4 Control circuit fuse
K1 3RF34 solid-state contactor for motorized loads
M1 Motor
R1 Varistor 3TX7 462-3L (recommended to maintain "surge" immunity)
S1 "ON" switch
Figure 3-36 Example circuit diagram: Fused motor feeder with solid-state contactor for motorized
loads with DC control circuit
SIRIUS Innovations
376 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.13 Circuit diagrams
U
6
5 /HIW
4
/ / / 6
$a 5LJKW
$a
$a
7 7 7
0
0
F1 - 3 Main circuit fuses (solid-state contactor recommended)
F4 Control circuit fuse
K1 3RF34 solid-state reversing contactor
M1 Motor
R1 Varistor 3TX7 462-3L (recommended to maintain "surge" immunity)
S1 "Left" switch
S2 "Right" switch
Figure 3-37 Example circuit diagram: Fused motor feeder with solid-state reversing contactor with AC
control circuit
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 377
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3.13 Circuit diagrams
SIRIUS Innovations
378 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors 4
4.1 Standards
Applicable standards
3RV2 motor starter protectors meet the requirements of the following standards:
Reference
Other standards that 3RV2 motor starter protectors conform to are listed in the chapter titled
Technical data (Page 453). SIRIUS components have been approved by a whole range of
bodies for various sectors (shipbuilding, etc.). An up-to-date list of approvals appears in
Chapter 20 of the Siemens Low Voltage LV1 Catalog, and more information, as well as an
option to download certificates, can be obtained on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 379
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.2 Product description
4.2.1 Introduction
Applications
3RV2 motor starter protectors are compact current-limiting devices which have been
optimized for load feeders. They are used for switching and protecting three-phase motors
and other loads. The scalable setting ranges mean that a suitable motor starter protector can
provide protection for all standard motors, even at ambient temperatures of > 60 °C. All
3RV2 motor starter protectors are fitted with a rotary operating mechanism.
Functions
The motor starter protectors protect loads against overloads and short circuits. They also
feature a lockable switch to facilitate manual switching on and off (e.g. in the event of repair
work).
System integration
In both electrical and mechanical terms the motor starter protectors are compatible with 3RT
contactors, 3RF solid-state contactors, and 3RW soft starters. They can be integrated in the
feeder by means of direct mounting. 3RV2 motor starter protectors are available in two sizes,
S00 and S0.
Connection systems
The motor starter protectors are available with the following connection system options:
● Screw-type connection system (up to 40 A)
● Spring-loaded connection system (up to 32 A)
● Ring cable lug connection system (up to 32 A)
Accessories
The accessories have been tailored to the motor starter protectors; they can be mounted
easily and without the need for tools.
SIRIUS Innovations
380 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.2 Product description
4.2.2 Versions
Device versions
● Motor starter protectors, standard version (3RV20)
Overload and short-circuit protection
● Motor starter protectors with relay function (3RV21)
Short-circuit protection and auto-RESET in the event of overload in one device
● MSP for starter combinations (3RV23)
Short-circuit protection only
Combined with overload relay, large setting ranges and auto-RESET
● MSP for transformer protection (3RV24)
Standard version for transformers
● Approved devices for North America according to UL489 (3RV27/3RV28)
Overload/short-circuit protection and transformer protection
Sizes
3RV2 motor starter protectors are available in two sizes, S00 and S0.
The table below lists the sizes and the corresponding maximum rated current at a voltage of
400 V AC. The last column of the table indicates the maximum power of the three-phase
motor which is suitable for the relevant size.
Number of poles
3RV2 motor starter protectors have 3 poles.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 381
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.2 Product description
4.2.3 Applications
General
3RV2 motor starter protectors are used for switching and protecting the following loads:
● Three-phase motors up to 18.5 kW at 400 V AC
● Loads with rated currents of up to 40 A
Special applications
The various 3RV2 motor starter protectors are suitable for:
● Short-circuit protection
● Motor protection (also with overload relay function)
● System protection
● Short-circuit protection for starter combinations
● Transformer protection
● As main and EMERGENCY OFF switches
● Use in IT systems
● Switching direct current
● Hazardous areas (ATEX)
● Use as Branch Circuit Protection Device (BCPD) according to UL (3RV27/28)
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
382 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.2 Product description
1 Terminals:
Up to two conductors with different cross-sections can be connected for the main and auxiliary
circuits. The auxiliary circuit can be connected using either screw terminals or spring-loaded
terminals. Some device versions are also available with ring cable lug connection.
2 Rotary operating mechanism:
For switching on and off, displaying a possible tripping operation, integrated locking device
3 Label
4 Connection for mounting contactors, solid-state contactors, and soft starters in various
connection systems:
• Direct mounting using link modules
• Separately using connecting cables
5 TEST function:
Facilitates the testing of the release mechanism.
6 Motor current setting:
The large rotary button provides an easy means of setting the device to the rated motor current.
Figure 4-1 Equipment, 3RV20 motor starter protectors
A sealable transparent cover can be optionally mounted (accessory). The cover prevents the
motor setting being adjusted (this option is not available for 3RV23/3RV27/3RV28).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 383
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.2 Product description
SIRIUS Innovations
384 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.3 Product combinations
Reference
More information ... Can be found in the chapter titled ...
About the possible combinations of standard System overview, under Device combinations
products from the SIRIUS modular system (Page 70)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 385
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.4 Functions
4.4 Functions
3RV2 motor starter protectors meet the requirements for motor and system protection
according to IEC 60947-2 / DIN VDE 0660-101.
Motor and system protection is achieved using the following functions:
● Overload protection
● Short-circuit protection
● Phase loss sensitivity
Overload protection
The current of the motor requiring protection is set on the setting scale. This sets the
integrated overload protection to the motor current.
Short-circuit protection
The short-circuit release is factory-set to a value that is 13 times the rated current of the
motor starter protector (upper setting scale). This ensures problem-free ramping-up and safe
protection for the motor.
Release
3RV2 motor starter protectors are fitted with the following releases:
● Inverse-time delayed thermal overload release (except for the 3RV23)
● Instantaneous short-circuit release
The overload releases can be set to the load feeder.
Note
Motor starter protectors for transformer protection
The motor starter protectors and circuit breakers for transformer protection (3RV24, 3RV28)
are set to 20 times the rated current to prevent undesirable tripping due to the high inrush
current.
SIRIUS Innovations
386 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.4 Functions
Table 4- 3 Tripping times dependent upon tripping classes according to standard IEC 60947-4-1
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 387
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.4 Functions
,>@
40
30
20
10
-10
-20
-30
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 I>+]@
SIRIUS Innovations
388 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.4 Functions
The operating current increases by approx. 40% in the case of direct voltage.
W>V@
PLQ
1
2
[,Q
,>$@
t Opening time
I Current
① 3-pole load CLASS 10
② 2-pole load CLASS 10
Figure 4-2 Schematic circuit diagram of the time-current characteristic curve for 3RV20
The characteristic curve reproduced above for the motor starter protector relates to a specific
setting range. It is, however, also valid as a schematic circuit diagram for motor starter
protectors with other current ranges.
Reference
Time-current characteristics, current-limiting characteristics, and I2t characteristics can be
requested on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support) via
"Technical Assistance".
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 389
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.4 Functions
SIRIUS Innovations
390 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.5 Configuration
4.5 Configuration
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 391
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.5 Configuration
CAUTION
In the overload range the motor starter protector with overload relay function does not
protect itself. Provision has to be made, therefore, to ensure that the current is safely
disconnected by a downstream switching device such as a contactor.
Note
Fixed connection: Auxiliary contacts with motor starter protector
The auxiliary contacts are connected to the right-hand side of the motor starter protector.
The connection is fixed and cannot be removed.
This means that auxiliary releases cannot be mounted on the right-hand side of 3RV21
motor starter protectors with overload relay function.
Reference
More information ... Can be found in the chapter titled ...
About motor starter protector operation Operation (Page 404)
Function
In the event of an overload, the overload relay trips the contactor. The motor starter protector
remains on. The motor starter protector will only trip as well in the event of a short circuit in
the feeder.
Like the motor starter protectors for motor protection, the short-circuit releases are set to a
fixed value of 13 times the rated current of the device.
Advantage
In the event of tripping due to overload, an automatic or manual reset can be performed
without having to open the control cabinet.
SIRIUS Innovations
392 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.5 Configuration
4 AM control transformers
This version of motor starter protector is not necessary in the case of 4 AM control
transformers with low inrush current (e.g. Siemens control transformers). In such cases
3RV20 motor starter protectors can be used for motor protection.
Function
In the case of IT systems the first fault (ground fault) does not necessarily lead to the
immediate disconnection of the system. A second unrelated fault (ground fault) can reduce
the switching capacity of the motor starter protector.
This is the case specifically if both ground faults occur in different phases and if one of the
two ground faults is on the motor starter protector's input side and the other is on its outgoing
side.
To maintain the motor starter protector's short-circuit-protection function even in the case of
two separate ground faults (known as a double line-to-ground fault), the reduced short-circuit
breaking capacity for double ground faults in IT systems IcuIT has to be taken into account.
Detecting a ground fault when it occurs (ground-fault monitoring) and dealing with it quickly
can significantly reduce the risk of a double ground fault and, as a result, that of a reduced
short-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT.
Reference
More information ... Can be found in the chapter titled ...
About short-circuit breaking capacity Technical data (Page 453)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 393
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.5 Configuration
Response values
The response values of the overload releases remain unchanged, while the response values
of the short-circuit releases increase by up to 40% with a DC current. The following table
contains suggested circuits for switching direct current:
Note
Double ground fault
In the case of the "2-pole switching, non-grounded system" circuit, it is assumed that safe
tripping will follow even in the event of a double ground fault which short-circuits two
contacts.
SIRIUS Innovations
394 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.5 Configuration
"Manual motor controller suitable for tap conductor protection in group installations" (up to 32 A)
3RV20 motor starter protector as "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in
Group Installations"
The "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations"
application is only applicable in the case of UL.
The CSA does not recognize this approval! Upstream short-circuit protection is always
implemented if the motor starter protector is used as a "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for
Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations". This requires approved fuses (according to
UL 248) or a circuit breaker (according to UL 489).
These devices must be dimensioned according to the National Electrical Code installation
regulation.
3RV20 motor starter protectors are approved as "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap
Conductor Protection in Group Installations" under the following file number:
● UL File No. 47705, CCN: NLRV
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 395
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.5 Configuration
3RV20 motor starter protector as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller (Type E)"
For approval according to UL 508, a clearance of 1 inch and a creepage distance of 2 inches
are required on the line side for a "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller".
Therefore, 3RV20 motor starter protectors in size S00/S0 are approved according to UL 508
together with the terminal block (order no. 3RV29 28-1H) or phase barriers (order
no. 3RV2928-1K).
CSA approval does not require extended clearances and creepage distances. The terminal
blocks or phase barriers can, therefore, be omitted for use as a "Self-Protected Combination
Motor Controller" according to the CSA.
3RV20 motor starter protectors are approved as "Self-Protected Combination Motor
Controller" under the following file numbers:
● UL File No. E156943, CCN: NKJH,
● CSA Master Contract 165071, Product Class: 3211 08.
Introduction
The following information must be taken into account when planning applications involving
3RV2 motor starter protectors.
Installation altitude
The motor starter protectors are approved for installation altitudes up to 2,000 m. The
reduced air density at altitudes higher than 2,000 meters affects the motor starter protectors'
electrical characteristics. The reduction factors which have to be taken into account when
using motor starter protectors at altitudes higher than 2,000 m can be obtained on request
on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
SIRIUS Innovations
396 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.5 Configuration
Operating conditions
3RV2 motor starter protectors are climate-proof. They are intended for use in enclosed
spaces in which no severe operating conditions prevail (e.g. dust, caustic vapors, hazardous
gases). If they are to be installed in dusty and damp spaces, suitable enclosures must be
provided.
3RV2 motor starter protectors can be supplied from above or below.
Ambient temperatures/Derating
The permissible ambient temperatures, maximum switching capacity, tripping currents, and
other limiting conditions relevant to application are listed in the technical data. Technical
information is available on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
3RV2 motor starter protectors are temperature-compensating according to IEC 60947-4-
1/VDE 0660 Part 102 in the temperature range from –20 °C to +60 °C. At temperatures from
+60 °C to +80 °C, the upper set value of the setting range has to be reduced by a specific
factor in accordance with the table below.
Note
Ambient temperatures > 40 A
The 36 A and 40 A versions are compatible for use in ambient temperatures of up to 40° C
maximum.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 397
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.5 Configuration
Explosion protection
Note
In the case of 2- and 3-pole loading, the permissible deviation of the tripping time with 300%
to 800% current setting is up to ± 20% maximum and as such meets the requirements of
DIN VDE 0165 and EN 50019.
3RV20, CLASS 10 motor starter protectors have ATEX approval according to EU Directive
94/9/EC (DMT certificate).1)
SIRIUS Innovations
398 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.5 Configuration
To return the tripping limits to the normal range, the setting of the overload release has to be
corrected. The following table shows the adjustment correction factors for the various setting
ranges dependent upon the converter's pulse frequency.
Application example
Motor starter protector with setting range 1.1 to 1.6 A downstream of a frequency converter
with a pulse frequency of 8 kHz and motor current rms value at rated load: 1.2 A.
Setting: 1.2 A x 1.21 = 1.45 A
Making this adjustment compensates the high-frequency currents. The tripping current is in
the normal range.
NOTICE
Harmonics
The harmonics can cause the rms value of the motor current to be higher than the motor
rated current. In such cases, undesirable tripping can occur in spite of a correction being
made.
To rectify the situation, the rms value of the motor current has to be determined at rated
load and used as the base current for the correction described above. Only measuring
instruments which are able to reproduce the true rms value up to the prevailing frequencies
are suitable for determining the values. Good examples include hot-wire instruments.
Although moving-iron measuring instruments are in principle also rms instruments, they can
only be used for frequencies up to 1 kHz and, therefore, are not compatible with the
majority of the scenarios described above. Commercially available multimeters or clip-on
ammeters are generally not suitable for taking measurements in these cases.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 399
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.5 Configuration
Practical example
In a system supplied by an inverter with a 3 kHz pulse frequency, the motors are connected
with cables measuring 80 m in length. An analysis of the actual current flow shows that very
high-frequency currents (up to 150 kHz) are superimposed on the motor current with a peak
value of 1.5 A. In the case of these frequencies, the effect on the thermal overload release is
significantly greater than described in The effects of high-frequency currents on the thermal
overload release (Page 398). Furthermore, capacitive leakage currents occur in this system
due to the cable length and the high frequency. These increase the current flowing through
the release and cause undesirable tripping.
An alternative approach is described below for cases in which high-frequency currents
significantly higher than 16 kHz occur and the procedure described in The effects of high-
frequency currents on the thermal overload release (Page 398) no longer rectifies the
problem. When the motor is operating without overload, the overload release has to be set
so high that it will not trip. Once the motor has been running for approx. 1.5 hours at full load,
the overload release has to be reduced to the tripping limit and then this limit set value has to
be increased by approx. 10%. This compensates the effects on the system. The value
hereby obtained can also be used as the correction factor for similar systems.
SIRIUS Innovations
400 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.6 Mounting
4.6 Mounting
Minimum clearances
The following clearances from grounded or live parts and from cable ducts made of molded
plastic must be observed in compliance with IEC 60947-2 when mounting motor starter
protectors.
= =
59 59
<
Mounting position
The mounting position of 3RV2 motor starter protectors can be selected at will.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 401
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.6 Mounting
4.6.1.2 Mounting
Mounting options
The motor starter protectors are mounted by
● Snapping them onto a 35 mm DIN rail conforming to DIN EN 60715 or
● Screwing them to a base plate
Mounting
3RV2928-0B
DIN EN 60715
Note
Push-in lugs
The motor starter protectors can be mounted on a level surface with 2 screws. In the case of
size S00 and S0 motor starter protectors, 2 push-in lugs (3RV2928-0B) (supplied in packs of
10) are also required.
Reference
More information ... Can be found in the chapter titled ...
About the drilling plan Dimension drawings for 3RV2 motor starter protectors (Page 478)
SIRIUS Innovations
402 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.7 Connection
4.7 Connection
Infeed
3RV2 motor starter protectors can be supplied from above or below.
Connection types
The motor starter protectors are available with the following connection types:
● Screw-type connection system
● Spring-loaded connection system
● Ring cable lug connection system
Connection of terminals
Within the SIRIUS modular system, the conductor cross-sections are matched to one
another dependent upon size.
Reference
More information ... Can be found in the chapter titled ...
About connecting the SIRIUS modular system System overview, under Connection (Page 74)
About conductor cross-sections and tightening torques Conductor cross-sections main circuit
(Page 459)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 403
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.8 Operation
4.8 Operation
Procedure
Use a screwdriver to set the load's rated current (current setting) Ie on the scale on the motor
starter protector.
In the context of this setting, a distinction is made between two fundamental designs:
1. Stand-alone assembly: No directly mounted contactor and clearance of at least 10 mm to
left and right.
2. Side-by-side design: Directly mounted contactor or clearance to left and right of less than
10 mm (commonly used design).
Note the two possible setting marks on the adjusting knob:
● Dash marking: Setting mark for the motor starter protector in stand-alone design.
● Triangular marking: Setting mark for the motor starter protector in side-by-side design.
In both cases you can use the full current range up to the scale mark at the top for size
S00/S0 motor starter protectors at ambient temperatures of up to + 60 °C.
Note
Max. ambient temperature at 36 A/40 A
In the case of motor starter protectors with 36 A/40 A the maximum permissible ambient
temperature is 40 °C.
Set the relevant setting mark (dash or triangle) to the load current.
1.6 A max
max. + 60 °C $
max. + 70 °C
1.4 1.1
,H
360 ° ok
SIRIUS Innovations
404 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.8 Operation
Current reduction
Current reduction is required at ambient temperatures above +60 °C. The maximum
permissible current setting for an ambient temperature of +70 °C is indicated on the scale by
a slightly longer mark on the scale. You can find more information about derating in the
chapter titled Application environment (Page 396).
TEST
Result
If the rotary button snaps into the tripped setting, the test was successful.
TEST
Result
The connected contactor disconnects.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 405
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.8 Operation
4.8.4 Securing
Function
You can secure the motor starter protector against unauthorized closing, for example, if
repair work needs to be carried out.
Procedure
Move the rotary switch to the OFF position. Take the cylinder out of the rotary lever. (This
locks the rotary operating mechanism.) Secure the motor starter protector against
unauthorized closing by locking the rotary switch with a padlock (shackle diameter 3.5 to
4.5 mm).
ෘಹPP
Tripping
When the motor starter protector trips, the rotary switch moves to the tripped setting to
indicate that it has tripped.
An option is available (in the form of an accessory) to have a signaling switch report tripping
electrically.
Reclosing
Reclosing takes place directly on the switch. The rotary operating mechanism has to be set
to O first before reclosing, to return the mechanism to readiness for operation. The motor
starter protector can then be reclosed.
SIRIUS Innovations
406 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9 Accessories
Accessories
For maximum flexibility, accessories can be added to the motor starter protector as required,
easily, and without the need for tools.
Mountable accessories
The mountable accessories for size S00/S0 3RV2 motor starter protectors are illustrated
below.
8
6
1 Signaling switch
2 Lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts
3 Lateral auxiliary switch with 4 contacts
4 Disconnector module
5 Terminal block type E
6 Undervoltage release
7 Shunt release
8 Transverse auxiliary switch
Figure 4-7 Motor starter protector size S00/S0 with mountable accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 407
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
Further accessories
● Phase barriers
● Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
● Enclosures and mounting accessories
● Sealable cover
● Insulated 3-phase busbar system
● 8US busbar adapter
● 3RV2917 infeed system
● Link modules for the installation of contactors, solid-state contactors or soft starters
For maximum flexibility, accessories can be added to the motor starter protector as required,
easily, and without the need for tools.
SIRIUS Innovations
408 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
Maximum expansion
The maximum expansion of the 3RV2 motor starter protector is one transverse auxiliary
switch, one lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts, one signaling switch, and one auxiliary
release.
The lateral auxiliary switch 2 NO + 2 NC can also be used as an alternative to a transverse
auxiliary switch and a lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts. However, in this case it will not
be possible to add a signaling switch. Accordingly, a maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts with
auxiliary switches may be mounted on each motor starter protector.
Possible combinations
The following auxiliary/signaling switch and auxiliary switch combinations are possible:
● The lateral auxiliary switch must be mounted to the left of the signaling switch.
● Transverse and lateral auxiliary switches can be combined.
● A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts may be added.
● One auxiliary release can be mounted on the right of each motor starter protector.
● The signaling switch must be selected before the auxiliary switch.
● Once a signaling switch has been selected, only one lateral auxiliary switch with 2
contacts can be selected. It is not possible to select the lateral auxiliary switch with 4
contacts.
● The total number of auxiliary switch contacts must not exceed 4.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 409
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.3.1 Description
Function
The contacts of the auxiliary switch open and close along with the main contacts on the
motor starter protector.
Versions
Note
• A maximum of four auxiliary contacts with auxiliary switches can be mounted on each
motor starter protector.
• Auxiliary switches (2 contacts) and signaling switches can be mounted individually or
together.
SIRIUS Innovations
410 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.3.2 Mounting
Note
The auxiliary switches are mounted in the same way for all sizes.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 411
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.3.3 Disassembly
Note
The auxiliary switches are disassembled in the same way for all sizes.
SIRIUS Innovations
412 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.4.1 Description
Function
The signaling switch has two contact systems:
● One contact system (1 NO contact + 1 NC contact) signals general tripping irrespective of
whether this was caused by a short circuit, an overload, or an auxiliary release.
● The other contact system (1 NO contact and 1 NC contact) only switches in the event of
short-circuit release.
To be able to reclose the motor starter protector after a short circuit, once the cause of the
error has been dealt with, the signaling switch has to be reset by hand.
Versions
Note
• A signaling switch can be mounted on the side of the motor starter protector.
• An auxiliary switch (2 contacts) and a signaling switch can be mounted individually or
together.
• The signaling switch cannot be used with 3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 413
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.4.2 Mounting
Reference
More information ... Is available in ...
About connection the chapter titled Circuit diagrams (Page 482)
4.9.4.3 Disassembly
SIRIUS Innovations
414 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
Overview
The signaling switch supplies two signals:
● A tripped signal (short circuit, overload or tripping by shunt release)
● A short-circuit signal (short circuit only)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 415
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.5.1 Description
Auxiliary release
The releases, which are not size-specific, are available in three versions:
● Undervoltage release
● Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts (2 NO contacts)
● Shunt release
The releases are mounted on the right-hand side of the motor starter protector and have a
width of 18 mm. They are available for all commonly used voltages all over the world. They
can be installed inside molded-plastic enclosures.
Note
Shunt release
For remote-controlled tripping of the motor starter protector
● Via PLC: The release's coil should only be energized for a brief period.
Undervoltage release
The undervoltage release trips the motor starter protector in the event of voltage interruption
(e.g. if the power supply fails) and prevents the motor from being unintentionally restarted
when the voltage is restored. The motor starter protector then has to be reclosed by hand.
Particularly suitable for EMERGENCY OFF disconnection via corresponding EMERGENCY
OFF pushbutton according to IEC 60204-1 (VDE 0113)
SIRIUS Innovations
416 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 417
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.5.3 Mounting
4.9.5.4 Disassembly
SIRIUS Innovations
418 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.6.1 Description
Disconnector module
The disconnector module is mounted on the motor starter protector on the infeed side. The
disconnector module can be used to form a visible isolating distance. To set up the isolating
distance, the plug connector is removed from the enclosure. The isolating plug can only be
removed with the supply disconnected.
The touch-proof isolating point is clearly visible and is secured with a padlock so that the
plug connector cannot be inserted during maintenance work, for example.
The disconnector module is compatible for use with all motor starter protector sizes.
Note
• The disconnector module cannot be used with 3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers.
• The disconnector module covers the connection screws on the transverse auxiliary
switch. Therefore, if you are using the disconnector module, we recommend that you use
the lateral auxiliary switches or wait until the transverse auxiliary switches have been
wired before mounting the disconnector module.
• The disconnector module must not be used in conjunction with the 3-phase busbar
3RV1915.
4.9.6.2 Mounting
Mounting sequence
Note
Mounting sequence for disconnector module and transverse auxiliary switch
The disconnector module covers the connection screws on the transverse auxiliary switch.
Therefore, we recommend that you use the lateral auxiliary switches or wait until the
transverse auxiliary switches have been wired before mounting the disconnector module.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 419
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
420 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 421
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.7.1 Description
Note
CSA
CSA approval does not require extended clearances and creepage distances.
Function
To ensure optimum protection against flashover between the connected conductors in the
event of a short circuit, phase barriers/terminals can be used. The phase barriers/terminals
are required to increase the clearances and creepage distances in conjunction with
prevailing switching overvoltages during motor starter protector switching. The phase
barriers/terminals increase the insulation strength between the motor starter protector's
connection contacts.
Restriction
The terminal block and the phase barriers cannot be used simultaneously with 3RV19.5 3-
phase busbars. If phase barriers are being used, the motor starter protectors can only be
mounted on DIN rails.
Versions
The terminal block and the phase barriers are only available in screw designs. They can only
be mounted on the motor starter protector using screw-type connection systems.
SIRIUS Innovations
422 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 423
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.8.1 Description
Versions
Door-coupling rotary Versions Width Mountable
operating mechanism
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms
Door-coupling rotary Black Depending on version Depending on version
operating mechanism
EMERGENCY STOP Red/yellow Depending on version Depending on version
door-coupling rotary
operating mechanism
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism for arduous conditions
Door-coupling rotary Gray Depending on version Depending on version
operating mechanism
EMERGENCY STOP Red/yellow Depending on version Depending on version
door-coupling rotary
operating mechanism
SIRIUS Innovations
424 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.8.2 Mounting
min. 16 mm
max. 20 mm
Note
Remember to observe the mechanical coding of the connecting rod!
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 425
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
Table 4- 24 Opening control cabinet doors with door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
Diagram Procedure
To open the control cabinet door, set the motor
starter protector to O (OFF). This will release the
extension shaft from the rotary operating
mechanism so that you can open the door.
2
If you need to open the control cabinet door
during operation, press the knob next to the
rotary knob to "override" the interlock (Step 1).
To close the door during operation, press this
knob again so that the extension shaft can re-
engage.
1
SIRIUS Innovations
426 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
Note
If the motor starter protector is set to ON and the door is opened with a force of
> 150 to 200 N, the extension shaft cap will break away from the rotary switch on the motor
starter protector to prevent irreparable damage to the motor starter protector. The motor
starter protector remains set to ON.
FD1
The extension shaft then needs to be re-attached to the motor starter protector and the door-
coupling rotary operating mechanism as described below:
Diagram Procedure
Switch off the motor starter protector (O) and turn
the rotary switch on the door-coupling rotary
operating mechanism to OFF.
Attach the extension shaft cap to the rotary
switch on the motor starter protector and then
insert the extension shaft into the cap.
Close the control cabinet door.
1
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 427
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
Locking
In the OFF position, the rotary operating mechanism can be secured by attaching up to
3 locks to the handle outside of the control cabinet, e.g. while maintenance work is carried
out on the system. In this case too, the motor starter protector must be set to the O position
first, before the locks are attached. The locking device on the handle is then pulled forward.
Up to three padlocks with a maximum shackle diameter of 8 mm can be attached to this
locking device.
SIRIUS Innovations
428 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.8.4 Operating the door-coupling rotary operating mechanism for arduous conditions
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 429
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
Note
Opening the door with a force of ≥ 800 N when the motor starter protector is set to I can
damage the mechanism beyond repair. The motor starter protector remains active. The
mechanism will keep the door closed up to a force of 800 N.
SIRIUS Innovations
430 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
Locking
∅ 3,5 ... 4,5 mm
The mechanism can be locked inside the control cabinet with a padlock. The motor starter
protector must be set to the O position first, before the lock is attached.
The mechanism can also be locked outside the control cabinet via the handle.
In this case too, the motor starter protector must be set to the O position first, before the
locks are attached. The locking device on the handle is then pulled forward. Up to five
padlocks with a maximum shackle diameter of 6 mm or three padlocks with a maximum
shackle diameter of 8.5 mm can be attached to this locking device.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 431
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.9.1 Description
General
Plastic enclosures for surface mounting and molded-plastic enclosures for flush mounting
are available in various dimensions for the stand-alone assembly of size S00 (In max = 16 A)
and S0 (In max = 32 A) motor starter protectors.
In the case of installation in molded-plastic enclosures the rated operational voltage Ue of the
motor starter protectors is 500 V.
The enclosures for surface mounting have IP55 degree of protection and those for flush
mounting also meet the requirements for IP55 degree of protection at the front (the flush-
mounted section complies with IP20).
Enclosures
All enclosures are equipped with N and PE terminals. They have 2 knockout cable entry
openings for cable glands at the top and 2 at the bottom, along with corresponding cable
entries scored on the rear. There is a knockout on the top of the enclosure for indicator lights
which are available as accessories.
The slim-line enclosure can accommodate a motor starter protector without accessories, with
transverse and lateral auxiliary switches. There is no provision for installing a motor starter
protector with signaling switch.
In the case of size S00 and S0 motor starter protectors, the molded-plastic enclosures are
fitted with a rotary operating mechanism.
The enclosures are available either with a black rotary operating mechanism or with an
EMERGENCY STOP rotary operating mechanism with red/yellow handle.
In the OFF setting, all rotary operating mechanisms can be locked with up to three padlocks.
Front plates
Many applications require motor starter protectors to be actuated in any type of enclosure.
Front plates equipped with a rotary operating mechanism are available for size S00 and S0
motor starter protectors for this purpose.
A holder for size S00 and S0 motor starter protectors is available for the front plates (the
motor starter protectors snap into the holder).
SIRIUS Innovations
432 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.9.2 Mounting
Various enclosures are available for the motor starter protectors.
Enclosure mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 433
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
157
cutout.
1
SIRIUS Innovations
434 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 435
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.10.1 Description
Sealable cover
A sealable cover compatible for use with all sizes is available for the motor starter protectors.
This cover can also be used for the 3RU21 thermal overload relay.
The sealable cover can be used to secure the rotary button for setting the rated motor
current against unauthorized manipulation.
4.9.10.2 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
436 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.11.1 Description
Note
Exceptions
The 3RV19 15 3-phase busbar systems are generally unsuitable for 3RV21 motor starter
protectors with overload relay function and for 3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers
conforming to UL 489/CSA C22.2 No.5-02. Neither can they be used with the 3RV2928-1A
disconnector module.
Type E starters
The 3-phase busbar systems can also be used to build "type E starters" in size S00, S0
according to UL/CSA. However, special infeed terminals have to be used for this purpose.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 437
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.11.2 Versions
Order no. Number of motor starter protectors that can be connected Incl. auxiliary Rated current In at
release 690 V
Modular spacing Without lateral Incl. lateral
[mm] accessories auxiliary switch
3RV19 15-1.. 45 2/3/4/5 - - 63
3RV19 15-2.. 55 - 2/3/4/5 - 63
3RV19 15-3.. 63 - - 2/4 63
1) Not suitable for 3RV21 motor starter protectors for motor protection with overload relay function and for 3RV27 and
3RV28 circuit breakersconforming to UL 489/CSA C22.2 No.5-02.
Note
Space requirements of the infeed terminal
The infeed terminal with connection from below is connected instead of a motor starter
protector. You will, therefore, need to take the space requirements into account when
configuring the 3-phase busbars.
SIRIUS Innovations
438 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.11.3 Mounting
NOTICE
Current carrying capacity
When extending the busbars, please take their current carrying capacity into account.
The diagrams below illustrate the mounting procedure for the 3-phase busbar system:
3RV1915-..B
3RV2925-5AB
3RV1915-6AB
3RV2915-5B
Figure 4-9 Mounting with 3-phase busbar
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 439
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.12.1 Description
Reference
For more information about busbar adapters, see Catalog LV 1.
4.9.12.2 Versions
Order no. Size Rated current Connecting Adapter length Adapter width Rated voltage
cable
A AWG mm mm V
for motor starter protectors with screw terminals
8US12 51-5DS10 S00 16 12 200 45 690
8US12 51-5NT10 S0 32 10 260 45 690
for motor starter protectors with spring-loaded terminals
8US12 51-5DT11 S00 16 12 260 45 690
8US12 51-5NT11 S0 32 10 260 45 690
SIRIUS Innovations
440 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
Accessories
The following accessories are available for busbar adapters:
● Device holder for lateral mounting on busbar adapters
● Lateral modules that can be attached on both sides for widening adapters
● Spacer to fix the feeder onto the busbar adapter (order no. 8US19 98-1BA10)
● Vibration and shock kit for increased vibration and shock load (order no.
8US19 98-1CA10)
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 441
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.12.3 Mounting
Prerequisites
DANGER
Hazardous voltage!
Electrical voltage can cause electric shocks or burns.
Before starting work, disconnect the systems and devices from the power supply.
10 mm
SIRIUS Innovations
442 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
$
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 443
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.12.4 Disassembly
Prerequisites
DANGER
Hazardous voltage!
Electrical voltage can cause electric shocks or burns.
Before starting work, disconnect the systems and devices from the power supply.
Mounting sequence
Note
The motor starter protector/feeder can be disassembled from the 8US busbar adapter either
before or after the 8US busbar adapter has been removed from the busbars.
SIRIUS Innovations
444 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 445
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.13.1 Description
Overview
The 3RV29 infeed system provides a convenient means of feeding in and distributing power
for a group of several motor starter protectors or complete load feeders with screw and
spring-loaded connections in size S00 and S0 (exception: this system cannot be used with
3RV21 motor starter protectors and 3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers). .
The system is based on a basic module complete with a lateral infeed (3-phase busbar with
infeed). This infeed with spring-loaded connections is attached on the left or right depending
on the version and can be fed in with a maximum conductor cross-section of 25 mm2 (with
end sleeve). A basic module has two slots onto each of which a motor starter protector can
be snapped.
Expansion modules (3-phase busbars for system expansion) are available for expanding the
system. An expansion plug is used to connect the individual modules.
The electrical connection between the 3-phase busbars and the motor starter protectors is
established using connectors. The complete system can be installed on a TH 35 DIN rail
conforming to DIN EN 60715 and can be expanded at will up to the maximum current
carrying capacity of 63 A.
The simple and time-saving plug-in connections mean that the system can be set up easily
and in next to no time. The lateral infeed means that the system does not take up as much
space in the control cabinet either. The additional overall height required for the infeed is just
30 mm. The option to have the infeed on both sides maximizes flexibility where the
configuration of the control cabinet is concerned: Infeed on left-hand or right-hand side as
well as infeed on one side and outfeed on the other side to supply further loads with power
are all possible. As well as the integration of SIRIUS motor starter protectors, a terminal
block with spring-loaded-connections in conjunction with a DIN rail also supports the
integration of 1-/2-/3-phase components such as 5SY miniature circuit breakers or SIRIUS
relay components.
SIRIUS Innovations
446 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
3b
5
3a
5
1
2
5
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 447
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
Connector ⑤
The connectors are used to establish the electrical connection between the 3-phase busbar
and the 3RV2 motor starter protector. There are various versions:
● 3RV2 motor starter protector, size S00
– With screw terminals (3RV2917-5CA00)
– With spring-loaded terminals (3RV2917-5AA00)
● 3RV2 motor starter protector, size S0
– With screw terminals (3RV1927-5AA00)
– With spring-loaded terminals (3RV2927-5AA00)
SIRIUS Innovations
448 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
The infeed system has been designed for installation on a 35 mm DIN rail with 7.5 mm
overall depth. These DIN rails provide the contactor base with a stable mounting surface.
When using DIN rails with a depth of 15 mm, the spacer connected to the underside of the
contactor base has to be knocked out and attached to the counterpart, which is also located
on the underside. This stabilizes the contactor base on the mounting surface. When using
DIN rails with a depth of 7.5 mm, the spacer has no function and can be removed.
The link modules are used for direct feeders, so it is not absolutely necessary to use a
contactor base. The motor starter protector and contactor assemblies can then be snapped
directly onto the slots in the 3-phase busbars. The corresponding link modules
(3RA19 21-1...., 3RA29 21-1...., 3RA29 11-2. or 3RA29 21-2....) should generally be used for
size S00 and S0 feeders.
4.9.13.2 Derating
Derating for fuseless load feeders S00/S0 in the 3RV (63 A) CC infeed system
Size Rated current Max. permissible rated operating Max. ambient temperature
Ie [A] current Ie [%] T [°C]
S00 ≤ 14 100 60
> 14 ... 16 87 60
> 14 ... 16 100 40
S0 ≤ 16 100 60
> 16 ... 25 87 60
> 16 ... 25 100 40
> 25 ... 32 87 40
> 32 Not permissible
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 449
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.13.3 Mounting
3RV2917-1A
3RV2917-4A
3RV2917-4B
m
7,5 m
3RV2917-5BA00
RSWLRQDO TH35-7.5
3RV2917-5E TH35-15
DIN EN 60715
m
3RV2917-6A 15 m
3RV2927-7AA00 F
D
M4 x 16 mm
Mt = 1,5 Nm
180º E
SIRIUS Innovations
450 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
The diagram below shows an example mounting scenario based on the attachment of the
3RV2 motor starter protector with spring-loaded terminals, size S0, to the 3RV2917 infeed
system.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 451
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.9 Accessories
4.9.14.1 Description
4.9.14.2 Mounting
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
452 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 453
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
454 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 455
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
Type 3RV29 Lateral auxiliary switch with Signaling Transverse auxiliary switch with
1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO, 2 NC, switch 1 CO contact 1 NO + 1 NC,
2 NO + NC 2 NO
Max. rated voltage
• Acc. to NEMA (UL) V AC 600 250
• Acc. to NEMA (CSA) V AC 600 250
Continuous current A 10 10 5 2.5
Switching capacity 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO, 2 NC: A600, B600, R300 C300, R300
A600, Q300; Q300
2 NO + 2 NC: A300, Q300
SIRIUS Innovations
456 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
1 CO contact
Rated operational voltage Ue alternating voltage V 125
Rated operational current Ie/AC-14 at Ue = 125 V A 0.1
Rated operational voltage Ue direct voltage L/R 200 ms V 60
Rated operational current Ie /DC-13 at Ue = 60 V A 0.3
Minimum load capacity V 5
mA 1
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 457
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
458 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 459
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
d3
d2
SIRIUS Innovations
460 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
d3
d2
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 461
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
Table 4- 32 Short-circuit breaking capacity ICU, ICS acc. to IEC 60947-2 - Part 1
SIRIUS Innovations
462 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
Table 4- 33 Short-circuit breaking capacity ICU, ICS acc. to IEC 60947-2 - Part 2
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 463
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
4.10.11.2 Short-circuit breaking capacity for motor starter protectors in the IT system
1 100 1) 100 1)
2 100 1) 8 25
2.5 100 1) 8 25
3.2 100 1) 8 32
4 100 1) 4 32
5 100 1) 4 32
6.3 100 1) 4 50
8 100 1), 4 50
10 100 1) 4 50
12.5 100 1) 4 63
16 55 80 4 63
SIRIUS Innovations
464 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
Rated current In Up to 440 V2)/460 V3) AC Up to 500 V2)/525 V3) AC Up to 690 V6) AC
IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse (gL/gG)4), 5) IcuIT Max.
(gL/gG)4), 5) fuse
(gL/gG)4)
A kA A kA A kA A
Size S00
0.16 ... 0.4 100 1) 100 1) 100 1)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 465
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
Rated current In Up to 440 V2)/460 V3) AC Up to 500 V2)/525 V3) AC Up to 690 V6) AC
IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse (gL/gG)4), 5) IcuIT Max.
(gL/gG)4), 5) fuse
(gL/gG)4)
A kA A kA A kA A
Size S0
16 2 50 2 50 1.5 40
20 2 50 2 50 1.5 50
22 2 50 2 50 1.5 50
25 2 50 2 50 1.5 50
28 2 63 2 63 1.5 63
32 2 63 2 63 1.5 63
36 2 63 2 63 1.5 63
40 2 63 2 63 1.5 63
1) No backup fuse required, as short-circuit-proof up to 100 kA
2) 10 % overvoltage
3) 5 % overvoltage
4) Backup fuse only required if short-circuit current at installation location is > IcuIT
5) Alternatively, fuseless limiter combinations can be used for 690 V AC
6) Overvoltage category II applies for applications in IT systems > 600 V
SIRIUS Innovations
466 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
4.10.11.3 Short-circuit breaking capacity for motor starter protectors with limiter function
Short-circuit breaking capacity for motor starter protectors with limiter function for 500 V AC and
690 V AC according to IEC 60947-2
The data for the short-circuit breaking capacity of motor starter protectors with limiter
function can be obtained on request on the Internet.
See also
Service & Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support)
4.10.12 Permissible rated data of approved devices for North America (UL/CSA)
Horsepower data
Operating Voltage
current
115 V 200/208 V 230/240 V 460/480 V 575/600 V
1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase
3RV2011/3RV2111/3RV2311/3RV2411 size S00
0.11...0.16 - - - - - - - - - -
0.14...0.2 - - - - - - - - - -
0.18...0.25 - - - - - - - - - -
0.22...0.32 - - - - - - - - - -
0.28...0.4 - - - - - - - - - -
0.35...0.5 - - - - - - - - - -
0.45...0.63 - - - - - - - - - -
0.55...0.8 - - - - - - - - - -
0.7...1 - - - - - - - - - 1/2
0.9...1.25 - - - - - - - 1/2 - 1/2
1.1...1.6 - - - - 1/10 - - 3/4 - 3/4
1.4...2 - - - - 1/8 - - 3/4 - 1
1.8...2.5 - - 1/6 1/2 1/6 1/2 - 1 - 1 1/2
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 467
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
Operating Voltage
current
115 V 200/208 V 230/240 V 460/480 V 575/600 V
1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase
2.2...3.2 1/10 - 1/6 1/2 1/4 3/4 - 1 1/2 - 2
2.8...4 1/8 - 1/4 3/4 1/3 3/4 - 2 - 3
3.5...5 1/6 1/2 1/3 1 1/2 1 - 3 - 3
4.4...6.3 1/4 1/2 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 - 3 - 5
5.5...8 1/3 3/4 3/4 2 1 2 - 5 - 5
7...10 1/2 1 1 2 1 1/2 3 - 5 - 7 1/2
9...12.5 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 3 2 3 - 7 1/2 - 10
11...16 1 2 2 3 2 5 - 10 - -
3RV2021/3RV2121/3RV2321/3RV2421 size S0
11...16 1 2 2 3 2 5 - 10 - -
14...20 1 1/2 3 3 5 3 5 - 10 - -
17...22 1 1/2 3 3 5 3 7 1/2 - 15 - -
20...25 2 3 3 5 (200 V) 3 7 1/2 - 15 - -
7 1/2 (208 V)
23...28 2 3 3 7 1/2 5 10 - 20 - -
27...32 2 5 3 (200 V) 7 1/2 (200 V) 5 10 - 20 - -
5 (208 V) 10 (208 V)
30...36 3 5 5 10 5 10 - 25 - -
34...40 3 5 5 10 7 1/2 10 - 30 - -
SIRIUS Innovations
468 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 469
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
470 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
"Manual motor controller suitable for tap conductor protection in group installations" (up to 32 A)
3RV20 motor starter protector as "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in
Group Installations"
The "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations"
application is only applicable in the case of UL.
The CSA does not recognize this approval! Upstream short-circuit protection is always
implemented if the motor starter protector is used as a "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for
Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations". This requires approved fuses (according to
UL 248) or a circuit breaker (according to UL 489).
These devices must be dimensioned according to the National Electrical Code installation
regulation.
3RV20 motor starter protectors are approved as "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap
Conductor Protection in Group Installations" under the following file number:
● UL File No. 47705, CCN: NLRV
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 471
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
472 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
3RV20 motor starter protector as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller (Type E)"
For approval according to UL 508, a clearance of 1 inch and a creepage distance of 2 inches
are required on the line side for a "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller".
Therefore, 3RV20 motor starter protectors in size S00/S0 are approved according to UL 508
together with the terminal block (order no. 3RV29 28-1H) or phase barriers (order
no. 3RV2928-1K).
CSA approval does not require extended clearances and creepage distances. The terminal
blocks or phase barriers can, therefore, be omitted for use as a "Self-Protected Combination
Motor Controller" according to the CSA.
3RV20 motor starter protectors are approved as "Self-Protected Combination Motor
Controller" under the following file numbers:
● UL File No. E156943, CCN: NKJH,
● CSA Master Contract 165071, Product Class: 3211 08.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 473
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
474 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
Reference
More information about accessories is available in the chapter titled Phase barriers/UL 508
"type E" terminals (Page 422).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 475
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
3RV2711
SIRIUS Innovations
476 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.10 Technical data
3RV2811
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 477
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Note
All dimensions are specified in mm.
Figure 4-10 Motor starter protector with screw-type connection system S00
SIRIUS Innovations
478 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Figure 4-12 Motor starter protector with spring-loaded connection system S00
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 479
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Figure 4-14 Motor starter protector with ring cable lug connection system
SIRIUS Innovations
480 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Drilling plan
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 481
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.12 Circuit diagrams
SIRIUS Innovations
482 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.12 Circuit diagrams
/ / / / / /
, , , , , ,
7 7 7 7 7 7
Motor starter protectors for motor Motor starter protector for starter protection
protection/transformer protection/system
protection
3RV20.1-...5, 3RV24.1-...5
/ / /
,! ,! ,!
Motor starter protectors for motor protection/transformer protection with transverse auxiliary
switch
3RV21.1-...0
7(67
/ / /
, , ,
7 7 7
Motor starter protectors for motor protection with overload relay function
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 483
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.12 Circuit diagrams
Auxiliary release
3RV2902-.A.. 3RV2922-.C.. 3RV2902-.D..
' ' &
8
8
&
' '
,!
Signaling switch
SIRIUS Innovations
484 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays 5
5.1 Standards
5.1.1 Standards
Applicable standards
3RU21 thermal overload relays and 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays meet the
requirements of the following standards:
Table 5- 1 Standards
Reference
Other standards that 3RU21 and 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays conform to are listed in the
chapter titled Technical data (Page 536). SIRIUS components have been approved by a
whole range of bodies for various sectors (shipbuilding, etc.). An up-to-date list of approvals
appears in Chapter 20 of the Siemens Low Voltage LV1 Catalog, and more information, as
well as an option to download certificates, can be obtained on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 485
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.2 Product description
5.2.1 Introduction
System integration
The overload relays have been matched to the contactors in the 3RT series both electrically
and mechanically and can be integrated in the feeder by means of direct mounting. The
thermal and the solid-state overload relays are available in two sizes, S00 and S0.
Connection systems
The overload relays are available with the following connection system options:
● Screw-type connection system
● Spring-loaded connection system
● Ring cable lug connection system (3RU21 only)
SIRIUS Innovations
486 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.2 Product description
Accessories
The accessories have been tailored to the overload relays; they can be mounted easily and
without the need for tools.
5.2.2 Versions
Table 5- 2 Sizes
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 487
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.2 Product description
5.2.3 Applications
Note
Protection of DC loads/single-phase AC loads
If a 3RU21 thermal overload relay is to be used to protect DC loads or single-phase AC
loads, all the bimetal strips have to be heated. Therefore, all of the relay's main current paths
have to be connected in series.
Note
DC loads/Single-phase AC loads
The relay is not suitable for protecting DC loads or single-phase AC loads. In the case of
loads with single-pole load, the 3RU21 thermal overload relay or the 3RB22/3RB23 solid-
state overload relay (only suitable for the protection of single-phase AC loads) should be
used.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
488 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.2 Product description
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 489
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.2 Product description
A sealable transparent cover can be optionally mounted (accessory). It stops the motor
setting being tampered with.
Auxiliary contacts
3RU21 thermal overload relays are equipped with an NO contact for the "tripped" message
and an NC contact for disconnecting the contactor.
SIRIUS Innovations
490 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.2 Product description
A sealable transparent cover can be optionally mounted (accessory). It stops the motor
setting being tampered with.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 491
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.2 Product description
Auxiliary contacts
3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays are equipped with an NO contact for the "tripped"
message and an NC contact for disconnecting the contactor.
SIRIUS Innovations
492 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.3 Product combinations
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 493
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.4 Functions
5.4 Functions
Note
Protection of DC loads and single-phase AC loads
Only 3RU21 thermal overload relays can provide an assurance of protecting DC loads and
single-phase AC loads against overload.
If a 3RU21 thermal overload relay is to be used to protect DC loads or single-phase AC
loads, all the bimetal strips have to be heated. Therefore, all of the relay's main current paths
have to be connected in series.
Phase-failure protection
3RU21 thermal overload relays and 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays feature phase
loss sensitivity (see the chapter titled Tripping characteristics (Page 496)) to minimize load
temperature rise in two-phase operation.
SIRIUS Innovations
494 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.4 Functions
Table 5- 4 Tripping times dependent upon tripping classes according to standard IEC/EN 60947-4-1
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 495
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.4 Functions
Introduction
The tripping characteristic curves map the relationship between tripping time and tripping
current as a multiple of the current setting Ie ; they are specified for symmetrical 3-pole and
for 2-pole loading from cold.
The lowest current at which tripping will occur is known as the minimum tripping current.
According to IEC/EN 60947-4-1/VDE 0660 Part 102, this current has to lie within specific
defined limits.
The limits for the total tripping current in the case of 3RU21/3RB30/3RB31 overload relays
with symmetrical 3-pole loading are between 105 and 120 % of the current setting.
Tripping characteristics
The limit tripping current determines the progression of the tripping characteristic curve up to
higher tripping currents based on the characteristics of the tripping classes (CLASS 10,
CLASS 20 etc., see the chapter titled Tripping classes (Page 495)).
The tripping classes describe time intervals within which the overload relays have to trip in
the case of a symmetrical, 3-pole load from the cold state with 7.2 times the current setting
Ie.
SIRIUS Innovations
496 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.4 Functions
W>V@
PLQ
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 497
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.4 Functions
t [s] t [s]
CLASS 30
CLASS 30
CLASS 20
CLASS 20
CLASS 10
CLASS 10
CLASS 5
CLASS 5
0,6 0,6
I [A] I [A]
Figure 1 Figure 2
Reference
The figures are schematic representations of the characteristic curves. The characteristic
curves for the individual overload relays can be downloaded from the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
SIRIUS Innovations
498 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.4 Functions
Introduction
In addition to current-dependent protection for loads against impermissibly high temperature
rise caused by overload, phase asymmetry, and phase failure, 3RB31 solid-state overload
relays feature internal ground-fault detection (not possible in conjunction with contactor
assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start). This provides protection of loads against high-
impedance faults to ground caused by damaged insulation, moisture, condensation, etc.
Ground-fault protection
In the event of a ground fault, the device trips immediately, disconnecting the contactor (and
thus the load) by means of the auxiliary contacts. To also protect the load and the system
against ground faults caused by damaged insulation, moisture, condensation, etc., the
overload relays support ground-fault monitoring by means of internal ground-fault detection.
Note
Contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start
Internal ground-fault detection is not possible with contactor assemblies star-delta (wye-
delta) start.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 499
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.4 Functions
Function
The auxiliary contacts control the contactor and signal overloads.
Note
Contact rating
The contact rating of the auxiliary switches to be taken into account is specified in the
Technical data (Page 536).
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
500 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.4 Functions
Resetting
The relay is reset manually or automatically after a recovery time has elapsed.
Reference
Additional information... Can be found in the chapter titled...
About resetting RESET after release (Page 517)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 501
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.4 Functions
RESET function
There are various ways to reset the device following an overload release.
Overload relay Auto RESET Manual Mech. remote RESET (accessory) Elect. remote
RESET RESET
Release slide Cable release
3RU21 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(accessory)
3RB30 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -
3RB31 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(built-in)
The relay cannot be reset until after the recovery time has elapsed.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
502 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.5 Configuration
5.5 Configuration
Note
In the case of three-phase current loads, only 3-pole circuits (3 phases) are permitted.
4-pole circuits (3 phases + neutral conductor) are not permitted.
NOTICE
Design of motor feeders
An overload relay alone cannot protect a load against overload. The overload relay simply
detects the current, evaluates it, and switches the auxiliary contacts according to the
relevant tripping characteristic curve. The connected contactor, and thus the load, are
disconnected via the auxiliary contacts.
A protective device such as a motor starter protector/circuit breaker (acc. to UL) or fuses
must be installed upstream of the load to provide protection against short circuits.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 503
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.5 Configuration
Appropriate contactors are required to protect loads. The table below provides an overview
of the assignments between overload relays and contactors, along with their power ratings.
Normal starting
Selecting the right overload relay means considering the start time as well as the rated motor
current. The start time refers to the time required by the motor between switching on and
reaching its rated speed.
Heavy-duty starting
Note
Special overload relays with corresponding tripping classes are required to protect heavy-
duty-starting motors (for the acceleration of large centrifuges, for example). In the case of
heavy-duty starting, the cables and contactors also have to be dimensioned specifically on
account of the increasing thermal load.
SIRIUS Innovations
504 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.5 Configuration
NOTICE
Internal ground-fault detection on the 3RB31
If you are using the 3RB31 solid-state overload relay in conjunction with contactor
assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start, internal ground-fault detection must not be
activated due to the occurrence of transient current peaks when switching over from star
(wye) to delta operation. These can cause ground-fault monitoring to respond.
Reference
More information ... Can be found in the chapter titled ...
About the currents to be set Project guidelines for use downstream of
frequency converters/inverters with pulsed
voltage (Page 398)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 505
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.5 Configuration
References
More information Can be found in the chapter titled
About the assignments of corresponding short- Technical data (Page 536) and in the
circuit protective devices to overload relays with configuration guide titled "Configuring SIRIUS
contactor Innovations - Selection data for load feeders in
fuseless and fused designs" (order no.:
3ZX1012-0RA21-1AC0)
Installation altitude
The overload relays are approved for installation altitudes up to 2,000 m. The reduced air
density at altitudes higher than 2,000 meters affects the overload relays' electrical
characteristics. The reduction factors which have to be taken into account when using
overload relays at altitudes higher than 2,000 m can be obtained on request from our
Technical Assistance on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
SIRIUS Innovations
506 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.5 Configuration
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 507
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.6 Mounting
5.6 Mounting
Minimum clearance
A minimum lateral clearance of > 6 mm must be maintained from grounded parts.
r r
,H[ ,H
,H[
,H[
The set value is 1.1 times the motor current for a mounting position in the hatched area.
SIRIUS Innovations
508 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.6 Mounting
5.6.3 Mounting/Disassembly
Table 5- 14 Mounting the 3RU21 overload relay with a screw-type connection system
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 509
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.6 Mounting
Table 5- 15 Mounting the 3RU21 overload relay with a spring-loaded connection system
D
The table below shows the openings of the main conductor terminals on the contactor into
which the overload relay contacts have to be inserted.
Main conductor terminals on the contactor (a) Main conductor terminals on the contactor (a)
(S00): (S0):
Note
Ring cable lug connection system
The procedure for mounting the overload relays with ring cable lug connection system is
similar to that for mounting with screw-type connection system.
SIRIUS Innovations
510 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.6 Mounting
Disassembly
To disassemble the contactor/relay combination from the DIN rail, press the contactor down
and pull it toward you.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 511
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.6 Mounting
Note
Ring cable lug connection system
The procedure for disassembling the overload relays with ring cable lug connection system
is similar to that for disassembly with screw-type connection system.
SIRIUS Innovations
512 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.7 Connection
5.7 Connection
Connection types
The overload relays are available with the following connection types for the main and
auxiliary current paths:
● Screw-type connection system
● Spring-loaded connection system
● Ring cable lug connection system (3RU21 only) with optional terminal covers
(accessories)
Conductor cross-sections
The conductor cross-sections of the devices in the SIRIUS modular system are matched to
one another on a size-specific basis. For more information, see the chapter titled Connection
(Page 74).
Touch protection
Please observe the information in the chapter titled Technical data (Page 536) with regard to
touch protection for 3RU21 thermal overload relays and 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload
relays (according to IEC 61140). Devices with screw-type and spring-loaded connection
systems are finger-safe. To achieve finger safety in the case of ring cable lug connection
systems, the addition of terminal covers (accessories) is required.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 513
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.7 Connection
Control circuit
An additional power supply is not required for the operation of 3RU21 thermal overload
relays.
Connection of terminals
Terminal Designation
2T1 Main circuit terminals
4T2
6T3
95 NC contact (NC 95-96)
96
97 NO contact (NO 97-98)
98
14/22 Feed-through contactor auxiliary switch (S00 only)
A2 Feed-through contactor coil terminal (S00 only)
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
514 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.7 Connection
Control circuit
3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays have an intrinsic supply; i.e. an additional power
supply is not required.
Connection of terminals
Terminal Designation
2T1 Main circuit terminals
4T2
6T3
95 NC contact (NC 95-96)
96
97 NO contact (NO 97-98)
98
14/22 Feed-through contactor auxiliary switch (S00 only)
A2 Feed-through contactor coil terminal (S00 only)
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 515
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.8 Operation
5.8 Operation
NOTICE
The overload relays may only be set between the setting marks at the top and the bottom of
the scale; in other words, a setting above or below the setting scale is not permitted.
The figure below shows how to set the rated motor current based on the example of the
3RU21 thermal overload relay, size S0.
max. + 60 °C A
max. + 70 °C
Ie
SIRIUS Innovations
516 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.8 Operation
T
SE
RE
A remote reset (remote RESET) is possible in conjunction with the mechanical and electrical
RESET modules, which are available as accessories. If automatic RESET is set on the
overload relay, the relay will be reset automatically. A relay can only ever be reset after the
recovery time has elapsed.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 517
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.8 Operation
CAUTION
Automatic RESET
An overload relay set to "automatic RESET" mode will be reset automatically after the
recovery time has elapsed, without the RESET button being pressed. An additional ON
button has to be used to ensure that the motor does not start up automatically following
tripping. If, in the event of an overload release, the overload relay is used without separate
thermistor protection, the motor may only be switched in by skilled personnel. "Automatic
RESET" mode must not be used in applications where there is a risk of personal injury or
property damage if the motor restarts unexpectedly.
Table 5- 18 Switching between manual and automatic on the 3RU21 thermal overload relay
MANUAL
AUTO
SIRIUS Innovations
518 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.8 Operation
Table 5- 19 Switching between manual and automatic on 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays
AUTO
Reset
MANUAL
Reset
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 519
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.8 Operation
TEST
Resetting
If the overload relay has been set to automatic RESET, the overload relay is automatically
reset when the TEST slide is released. The relay must be reset with the RESET button if it
has been set to manual RESET.
T
SE
RE
SIRIUS Innovations
520 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.8 Operation
Note
The TEST button must be held down throughout the test. In this case the motor current must
be > 80% of the current setting Ie and equal to at least the value of the lower current setting.
The switch position indicator slide can be used to test the auxiliary contacts and the control
current wiring. The tripping of the relay can be simulated by moving the slide. This simulation
process opens the NC contact and closes the NO contact, thereby checking that the auxiliary
circuit has been wired correctly. The relay is reset after a test trip by pressing the RESET
button.
The user test has been completed successfully if:
● The device trips within the maximum permissible time and
● Contact 95-96 is open (test for welding)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 521
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.8 Operation
Auxiliary contacts
The overload relay is equipped with an NO contact (NO 97-98) for the "tripped" signal and an
NC contact (NC 95-96) for disconnecting the contactor. The auxiliary contacts have high
contact reliability; this makes them suitable for PLCs. Furthermore, the high switching
capacity facilitates direct switching of the contactor coil.
The table below shows how the auxiliary contacts respond when the TEST, STOP (3RU21
only), and RESET buttons are pressed.
NO 97/98
TRIP 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
SIRIUS Innovations
522 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.9 Accessories
5.9 Accessories
5.9.1 Accessories
For maximum flexibility, accessories can be added to the overload relays as required, easily,
and without the need for tools.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 523
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.9 Accessories
5.9.2.1 Description
5.9.2.2 Mounting/Disassembly
The terminal supports can be snapped onto 35 mm DIN rails according to DIN EN 50022.
They can also be screw-mounted.
The figure below shows how the terminal support for stand-alone assembly is mounted,
based on the example of a 3RU21 thermal overload relay.
SIRIUS Innovations
524 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.9 Accessories
Disassembly
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 525
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.9 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
526 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.9 Accessories
5.9.3.1 Description
Release slide
There is one release slide for thermal overload relays and one for solid-state overload relays;
both are compatible for use with all sizes. The release slide with holder and former is used to
activate the RESET from the control cabinet door; it is shortened to the required length. A
pushbutton with extended travel and an extension plunger for compensation of the distance
between the pushbutton and the relay's unlocking button are available for the release slide.
5.9.3.2 Mounting/Disassembly
The figure below shows how the release slide, the holder, the former, and the pushbutton
are mounted based on the example of a size S0 3RU21 thermal overload relay:
Prerequisite
Before the release slide can be mounted, the release slide and the optional extension
plunger have to be shortened to the required length.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 527
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.9 Accessories
5 3SX1335
3SB3000-0EA11
4
Disassembly
The figure below shows how to disassemble the holder based on the example of the
3RU21 thermal overload relay:
SIRIUS Innovations
528 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.9 Accessories
5.9.4.1 Description
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 529
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.9 Accessories
5.9.4.2 Mounting/Disassembly
The figure below shows how the cable release with holder is mounted based on the example
of a size S00 3RU21 thermal overload relay:
Ø 6.5 mm
≤ 8 mm
Disassembly
The figure below shows how to disassemble the holder for the cable release based on the
example of the 3RU21 thermal overload relay:
Table 5- 27 Cable release disassembly
SIRIUS Innovations
530 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.9 Accessories
5.9.5.1 Description
Function
An electrical remote RESET module which is compatible for use with all sizes is available for
the 3RU21 thermal overload relay. This module enables the overload relay to be reset
electrically from the control room following tripping. The module's coil is dimensioned for an
operating duration of 0.2 s to 4 s; maintained-contact operation is not permissible.
Connection
The screw connections on the terminals of the electrical remote RESET module have the
same format as the screw connections on the auxiliary contacts of the 3RU21 overload relay.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 531
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.9 Accessories
5.9.5.3 Mounting/Disassembly
The figure below shows how to assemble the electrical remote RESET module based on the
example of size S0.
Table 5- 29 Mounting the electrical remote RESET module on the thermal overload relay
Disassembly
Table 5- 30 Disassembling the electrical remote RESET module from the thermal overload relay
SIRIUS Innovations
532 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.9 Accessories
5.9.6.1 Description
Sealable cover
There is one sealable cover for thermal overload relays and one for solid-state relays; both
are compatible for use with all sizes. The 3RV2908-0P cover can be used as an accessory
for 3RU2 thermal overload relays and 3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers (acc. to
UL).
The sealable cover can be used to protect the rotary button for setting the rated motor
current and the CO contact for the tripping classes (3RB31 only) against unauthorized
manipulation.
5.9.6.2 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 533
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.9 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
534 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.9 Accessories
5.9.7.1 Description
Function
Covers must be fitted to thermal overload relays with ring cable lug connection system to
achieve finger-safety according to IEC 61140. Both line-side and output-side covers are
available.
Additional covers are not required for devices with spring-loaded and screw-type connection
systems.
58%- 58%-
57($ 57($
58%- 59$$
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 535
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
536 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.10 Technical data
5.10.1.3 Equipment
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 537
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.10 Technical data
1) As SIRIUS 3RU21 thermal overload relays work on the basis of the bimetal principle, they
SIRIUS Innovations
538 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.10 Technical data
5.10.2 3RU21
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 539
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.10 Technical data
Table 5- 39 Technical data for the main circuit, 3RU21 overload relays
SIRIUS Innovations
540 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.10 Technical data
Table 5- 40 Technical data for the main circuit connection, 3RU21 overload relays
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 541
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.10 Technical data
d3
d2
SIRIUS Innovations
542 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.10 Technical data
Table 5- 41 Technical data for the auxiliary circuit connection, 3RU21 overload relays
- 110 V A 0.22
- 125 V A 0.22
- 220 V A 0.11
• Conventional thermal current Ith A 6
• Contact reliability Yes
(suitability for PLC, 17 V, 5 mA)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 543
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.10 Technical data
Table 5- 42 Technical data for the auxiliary circuit connection, 3RU21 overload relays
SIRIUS Innovations
544 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.10 Technical data
d3
d2
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 545
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.10 Technical data
5.10.3 3RB30/3RB31
SIRIUS Innovations
546 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 547
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.10 Technical data
Table 5- 44 Technical data for the main circuit, 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays
SIRIUS Innovations
548 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.10 Technical data
Table 5- 45 Technical data for the main circuit connection, 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 549
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.10 Technical data
Table 5- 46 Technical data for the auxiliary circuit connection, 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays
SIRIUS Innovations
550 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.10 Technical data
Table 5- 47 Technical data for the main circuit connection, 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 551
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Note
All dimensions are specified in mm.
3RU2116-..B0 (S00)
45 5 76
29
118
33
Figure 5-7 3RU2116-..B0
3RU2116-4.B1 (S00)
45 75
56
37
89
5 36
Figure 5-8 3RU2116-4.B1
SIRIUS Innovations
552 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
3RU2116-..C0 (S00)
45 94
35
136
64
Figure 5-9 3RU2116-..C0
3RU2116-..C1 (S00)
45 80
60
51
102
5 56
Figure 5-10 3RU2116-..C1
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 553
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
3RU2126-..B0 (S0)
45 5 a
43
152
3RU2126-4.B1 (S0)
45 5 90
62
44
97
44
SIRIUS Innovations
554 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
3RU2126-..C0 (S0)
45 5 a
51
185
3RU2126-4.C1 (S0)
92
45 5 72
55
114
73
Figure 5-14 3RU2126-4.C1
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 555
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
3RB3.1.-..B0 (S00)
3RB3.1.-..E0 (S00)
SIRIUS Innovations
556 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Figure 5-18
3RB3.1.-..E0 and 3RU2916-3AC01
3RB3.2.-..B0
D
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 557
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
3RB3.2.-..E0 (S0)
D
SIRIUS Innovations
558 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.12 Circuit diagrams
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 559
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.12 Circuit diagrams
5(6(7
6723
7(67
/ / /
Figure 5-24 Thermal overload relay, screw-type and ring cable lug connection systems, S00
3RU2116-..C.
5(6(7
6723
7(67
3RU2126-....
5(6(7
6723
7(67
SIRIUS Innovations
560 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.12 Circuit diagrams
5(6(7
7(67
/ / /
Figure 5-27 3RB30 solid-state overload relay, screw-type connection system, S00
3RB3016-..E.
5(6(7
7(67
Figure 5-28 3RB30 solid-state overload relay, spring-loaded connection system, S00
3RB3026-....
5(6(7
7(67
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 561
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.12 Circuit diagrams
5(6(7
7(67
/ / / $
9
Figure 5-30 3RB31 solid-state overload relay, screw-type connection system, S00
3RB3113-..E.
5(6(7
7(67
9
Figure 5-31 3RB31 solid-state overload relay, spring-loaded connection system, S00
3RB3123-....
5(6(7
7(67
9
SIRIUS Innovations
562 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders 6
6.1 Standards
Fuseless load feeders are manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC 60947 – Part 1
and Part 2.
Types of coordination
Types of coordination are important selection criteria for fuseless load feeders. They are
defined in the appendix, under .
Approvals/Test reports
Extensive approvals and test certificates are available for 3RA2 pre-assembled complete
devices. All approvals and test certificates for the individual devices involved apply if load
feeders are being self-assembled.
Reference
The standards from Catalog LV 1 "Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution SIRIUS -
SENTRON - SIVACON" in the appendix always apply. You will find extracts from the most
important standards relating to the innovations of the SIRIUS modular system in the chapter
titled System Overview, under Standards (Page 23).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 563
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.2 Product description
6.2.1 Overview
A detailed overview of the fuseless load feeders product range appears below.
Types of coordination
Fuseless load feeders up to 38 A (discrete configuration of individual devices) and 32 A (pre-
assembled complete devices) can be configured in sizes S00 and S0. The overall width is
45 mm for all individual devices.
The table below lists the maximum power of the three-phase motor for pre-assembled
3RA2 complete devices based on the type of coordination at a voltage of 400 V AC.
SIRIUS Innovations
564 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.2 Product description
Reference
Auxiliary contacts
The following auxiliary contacts are integrated into fuseless load feeders dependent upon
size.
Mounting
The devices are prepared for DIN rail mounting, for mounting on a 60 mm busbar or for
mounting directly on a wall. The smaller sizes can be snapped directly onto a DIN rail without
the need for adapters.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 565
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.2 Product description
Connection systems
3RA2 fuseless load feeders are available with the following connection system options.
Rated powers
3RA2 pre-assembled feeders are dimensioned for the following powers:
● Direct-on-line starters up to 15 kW (32 A)
● Reversing starters up to 15 kW (32 A)
SIRIUS Innovations
566 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.2 Product description
The modularity of the SIRIUS system means that the standard devices are perfectly matched
from both a mechanical and an electrical point of view. Wiring kits for contactor assemblies
for reversing and star-delta (wye-delta) start in various connection systems provide a
straightforward means of assembling starter combinations. Assembly kits are available for
mounting self-assembled load feeders on DIN rails or busbars.
Reference
Connection systems
Self-assembled fuseless load feeders are available with the following connection system
options.
Rated powers
The pre-assembled feeders are dimensioned for the following powers:
● Direct-on-line starters up to 17.5 kW (38 A)
● Reversing starters up to 17.5 kW (38 A)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 567
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.2 Product description
6.2.3 Applications
Fuseless load feeders can be used anywhere in industrial electrical applications where fuse,
contactor, and overload relay combinations were previously used. The increased
functionality of the motor starter protector (unlike a fuse combination, it can be used as an
EMERGENCY OFF and as a disconnector) means that a fuseless load feeder is capable of
solving numerous applications easily.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
568 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.3 Product combinations
Device combination
Motor starter protector Contactor1)
Motor starter protector Contactor Thermal or solid-state overload
relay1)
Motor starter protector Contactor SIMOCODE pro1)
Motor starter protector Contactor SIRIUS 3RR monitoring relay1)
Motor starter protector Reversing contactor assembly1)
Motor starter protector Contactor assembly for star- Thermal or solid-state overload
delta (wye-delta) start relay2)
Motor starter protector Contactor assembly for star- SIMOCODE pro2)
delta (wye-delta) start
Motor starter protector 3RW30, 3RW40, 3RW44 soft starters
Motor starter protector Solid-state contactor or solid-state reversing contactor
Motor starter protector Solid-state contactor SIRIUS 3RR monitoring relay
1) Also with 3RA27 communication connection
2) Also with 3RA27 communication connection or 3RA28 logic module
The configuration manual contains detailed information about individual device
combinations. The configuration manual describes fuseless and fused load feeders for
various line voltages.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 569
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.4 Functions
6.4 Functions
Pre-assembled load feeders
In the 3RA2 fuseless load feeder, the 3RV2 motor starter protector takes on the dual
function of overload protection and short-circuit protection. Upstream protective devices such
as melting fuses or limiters are superfluous, as the motor starter protector is capable of
withstanding short circuits up to 150 kA at 400 V.
The 3RT2 contactor is suitable for extremely complex switching tasks requiring maximum
durability.
Tripping class CLASS 10 is a fixed setting on all pre-assembled 3RA2 feeders.
Reference
More information ... Can be found in the chapter titled ...
About the functions of motor starter protectors SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors, under
Functions (Page 386)
SIRIUS Innovations
570 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.5 Configuration
6.5 Configuration
Application planning
You will find detailed information about configuration in the configuration manual. The
configuration manual describes fuseless and fused load feeders for various line voltages.
Reference
More information ... Can be found ...
About applications involving contactors In the chapter titled
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies,
under Overview of applications for contactors and
contactor assemblies (Page 116)
About applications involving motor starter In the chapter titled SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter
protectors protectors, under Configuration (Page 391)
About configuration In the configuration guide titled "Configuring
SIRIUS Innovations - Selection data for load
feeders in fuseless and fused designs" (order no.:
3ZX1012-0RA21-1AC0)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 571
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
6.6 Mounting
Motor starter protector Clearance from grounded or live parts as well as from molded-plastic
in combination with contactors cable ducts according to IEC 60947-4
Motor Contactor Rated operational Y X21) Z
starter voltage mm mm mm
protector
3RV2.1 3RT201 400 20 10 9
3RV2.2 3RT201 400 30 10 9
3RT2.2 400 30 10 9
Z Z
Y
3RV2... 3RV2...
3RT2... 3RT2...
1) Minimum clearance from contactor at the front. There is no minimum clearance requirement at the front for the motor
starter protector.
SIRIUS Innovations
572 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
The following table lists the installation guidelines for fuseless load feeders (size S00 and S0).
Table 6- 8 Installation guidelines - Fuseless load feeders (size S00 and S0)
Combination
Power
Clearance between feeders
Permissible installation: h = horizontal, v = vertical
Max. ambient temperature:
Vibration and shock1)
A mm h, v °C
Motor starter protector and contactor
3RA21 direct-on-line starter, screw
connection, DIN rail or wall
S00 ≤ 14 0 h, v 60 Unlimited
14 … 16 10 h 60
0 h, v 40
S0 ≤ 29 0 h, v 60 DIN rail adapter required
29 … 32 10 h 60
0 h, v 40
3RA21 direct-on-line starter, screw
connection, busbar
S00 16 2) 2) Vibration and shock kit 8US19 98-1CA10
required
S0 32 2) 2) Vibration and shock kit 8US19 98-1CA10
required
3RA22 reversing starter, screw
connection, DIN rail or wall
S00 ≤ 14 0 h, v 60 DIN rail adapter required
14 … 16 10 h 60
0 h, v 40
S0 ≤ 29 0 h, v 60 Unlimited
29 … 32 10 h 60
0 h, v 40
3RA22 reversing starter, screw
connection, busbar
S00 16 2) 2) Vibration and shock kit 8US19 98-1CA10
required
S0 32 2) 2) Vibration and shock kit 8US19 98-1CA10
required
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 573
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
Combination
Power
Clearance between feeders
Permissible installation: h = horizontal, v = vertical
Max. ambient temperature:
Vibration and shock1)
A mm h, v °C
3RA21 direct-on-line starter, spring-
loaded connection, DIN rail or wall
S00 ≤ 14 0 h, v 60 Unlimited
14 … 16 10 h 60
0 h, v 40
S0 ≤ 29 0 h, v 60 DIN rail adapter required
29 … 32 10 h 60
0 h, v 40
3RA21 direct-on-line starter, spring-
loaded connection, busbar
S00 16 2) 2) Vibration and shock kit 8US19 98-1CA10
required
S0 32 2) 2) Vibration and shock kit 8US19 98-1CA10
required
3RA22 reversing starter, spring-loaded
connection, DIN rail or wall
S00 ≤ 14 0 h, v 60 DIN rail adapter required
14 … 16 10 h 60
0 h, v 40
S0 ≤ 29 0 h, v 60 Unlimited
29 … 32 10 h 60
0 h, v 40
3RA22 reversing starter, spring-loaded
connection, busbar
S00 16 2) 2) Vibration and shock kit 8US19 98-1CA10
required
S0 32 2) 2) Vibration and shock kit 8US19 98-1CA10
required
SIRIUS Innovations
574 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
Combination
Power
Clearance between feeders
Permissible installation: h = horizontal, v = vertical
Max. ambient temperature:
Vibration and shock1)
A mm h, v °C
Motor starter protector and soft starter,
screw connection, DIN rail or wall
S00 16 2) 2) The feeder must be screwed tight to the
top of the motor starter protector with two
screws and fastened to the bottom of the
soft starter with a self-locking screw. Not
approved for railways, power plants, or
shipbuilding.
S0 32 2) 2) The feeder must be screwed tight to the
top of the motor starter protector with two
screws and fastened to the bottom of the
soft starter with a self-locking screw. Not
approved for railways, power plants, or
shipbuilding.
Motor starter protector and soft starter,
spring-loaded connection, DIN rail or wall
S00 16 2) 2) The feeder must be screwed tight to the
top of the motor starter protector with two
screws and fastened to the bottom of the
soft starter with a self-locking screw. Not
approved for railways, power plants, or
shipbuilding.
S0 32 2) 2) The feeder must be screwed tight to the
top of the motor starter protector with two
screws and fastened to the bottom of the
soft starter with a self-locking screw. Not
approved for railways, power plants, or
shipbuilding.
Motor starter protector and solid-state
contactor, screw connection, DIN rail or
wall
Direct-on-line starter Unlimited Not approved for railways,
power plants, or shipbuilding.
Reversing starter Unlimited Not approved for railways,
power plants, or shipbuilding.
1)Vibration and shock tests are carried out in accordance with SN 31205 as well as with the relevant standards for
railways, shipbuilding, and power plants.
2) Please consult Technical Assistance (www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 575
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
6.6.2.1 Overview
Please proceed as per the mounting instructions below for self-assembly of 3RA2 load
feeders.
Connection systems
Sizes S0 and S00 support three connection systems:
● Screw connection
● Spring loaded
● Hybrid connection
The hybrid connection system combines screw-type and spring-loaded connection
technology. Motor starter protectors with screw connection and contactors with spring-loaded
connection can be installed together in the load feeder.
The modular system has suitable link modules for each connection system.
Reference
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
576 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
Note
Mounting the S0 motor starter protector and S00 contactor with screw-type connection
system
The link module for the S00 load feeder can also be used to mount an S00 contactor on an
S0 motor starter protector.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 577
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
Note
Reverse the above sequence to disassemble both sizes S00 and S0.
SIRIUS Innovations
578 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 579
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
E
Table 6- 12 Main conductor terminals on contactor and motor starter protector (size S00)
Main conductor terminals on the contactor (a) Main conductor terminals on the motor starter
(S00): protector (b) (S00):
D D D
E E E
SIRIUS Innovations
580 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
E
D
D
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 581
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
582 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
Note
Proceed in the same way to disassemble the reversing starter (size S00).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 583
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
584 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
E
$&
Table 6- 15 Main conductor terminals on contactor and motor starter protector (size S0)
Main conductor terminals on the contactor (a) Main conductor terminals on the motor starter
(S0): protector (b) (S0):
D D D
E E E
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 585
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
Note
Contactor size S0 alternating current (AC)
S0 contactors with AC operation and spring-loaded connection system need a spacer (d) for
DIN rail or busbar adapter mounting.
E
D
D
SIRIUS Innovations
586 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 587
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
Note
Proceed in the same way to disassemble the reversing starter (size S0).
SIRIUS Innovations
588 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 589
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
D D D
Note
Mounting the S0 motor starter protector and S00 contactor with hybrid connection system
The link module for the S00 load feeder can also be used to mount an S00 contactor on an
S0 motor starter protector.
SIRIUS Innovations
590 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 591
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
G
$&
D D D
SIRIUS Innovations
592 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
Note
Contactor size S0 alternating current (AC)
S0 contactors with AC operation and spring-loaded connection system need a spacer (d) for
DIN rail or busbar adapter mounting.
Note
Reverse the above sequence to disassemble both sizes S00 and S0.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 593
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
NOTICE
Vibration or shock load on size S00 reversing starters
In the case of vibration or shock load (such as in railway applications, for example), the
fuseless load feeder (size S00 reversing starter) has to be mounted on a DIN rail adapter to
protect the individual devices against damage.
CAUTION
Possible damage to load feeder.
If the load feeder is mounted directly on the DIN rail without a DIN rail adapter, there is no
guarantee that the fastening will be vibration-proof.
Size S0 reversing starters have to be mounted with DIN rail adapters. However, DIN rail
adapters can be omitted when using busbar adapters.
SIRIUS Innovations
594 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
Types of adapter
The DIN rail adapter is the same for all devices. A pair of adapters is required for mounting a
reversing contactor assembly.
[
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 595
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
Left Size S0 reversing starter with DC operation and spring-loaded connection system
Right Size S0 reversing starter with DC/AC operation and screw-type connection system
SIRIUS Innovations
596 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
Mounting the size S0 reversing starter with AC operation and spring-loaded connection system on
DIN rail
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 597
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
Figure 6-4 Size S0 reversing starter with spring-loaded connection system mounted on busbar
The busbar adapters and the associated mounting parts can be purchased as accessories.
● Part of the assembly kit.
● Part of the pre-assembled load feeders.
SIRIUS Innovations
598 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
Types of adapter
Busbar adapters and device holders: Busbar adapters are available with or without pre-
assembled connecting cables. Busbar adapters without connecting cables are known as
"device holders".
Busbar adapters and device holders are available in mounting heights of 200 mm and
260 mm. All device combinations can be mounted on the long adapter. The short adapter
can only be used for size S00 devices with screw-type connection systems.
1 Busbar adapter
2 Device holder
Figure 6-5 Busbar adapter and device holder, two mounting heights
Pairs of adapters: A pair of adapters comprising a busbar adapter and a device holder is
required for the busbar mounting of a reversing contactor assembly. The pair of adapters
can be assembled from individual components without the need for tools.
Figure 6-6 Pair of adapters for reversing contactor assembly (busbar adapter and device holder)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 599
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
Figure 6-7 Connecting the adapters for mounting reversing contactor assemblies
The link wedges are included in the assembly kit for reversing operation or can be ordered
separately as accessories.
SIRIUS Innovations
600 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
DANGER
Hazardous voltage!
Electrical voltage can cause electric shocks or burns.
Before starting work, disconnect the systems and devices from the power supply.
The busbar adapter and the device holder can be adjusted to suit the following busbar
thicknesses:
● 5 mm (delivery condition)
● 10 mm
10 mm
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 601
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
602 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 603
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
The connecting piece and spacer are included in the assembly kit or can be ordered
separately.
The table below lists the openings on the adapter into which the connecting piece for the
various types of feeder need to be inserted.
SIRIUS Innovations
604 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
Table 6- 25 Insertion of the connecting piece into the busbar adapter/device holder
Type of feeder Size Connection system Order number Opening from the bottom
Direct-on-line starter S00 Screw connection • 3RA2110-..D..-0AP0 3., 4. and 5th (200 mm
• 3RA2110-..D..-0BB4 adapter)
Wall mounting
All load feeder components are delivered ready for wall mounting. The components' size
dictates whether they are mounted on the wall with or without DIN rail adapters.
Table 6- 26 Wall mounting with or without DIN rail adapter, depending on size
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 605
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
NOTICE
Short-circuit hazard
In the case of screw-mounting on the wall without DIN rail adapter, the feeder must not be
screwed to a conductive base. Insulation is necessary to prevent a short circuit to the base
plate as a result of a motor starter protector short circuit.
Note
2 x M4 screws (1.2 to 1.6 Nm) should be used to fasten the contactors.
SIRIUS Innovations
606 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.6 Mounting
Note
2 x M4 screws (1.2 to 1.6 Nm) should be used to fasten the DIN rail adapters.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 607
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.7 Connection
6.7 Connection
Conductor cross-sections
The conductor cross-sections are the same as those of the individual devices.
Reference
6.8 Operation
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
608 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.9 Accessories
6.9 Accessories
6.9.1 Overview
Reference
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 609
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.9 Accessories
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
610 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.9 Accessories
Function
The link module establishes the electrical and mechanical connection between motor starter
protector and contactor/soft starter/solid-state contactor. There are three different types
according to connection system:
● Link module for devices with screw-type connection system
● Link module for devices with spring-loaded connection system
● Link module for hybrid connection
Versions
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 611
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.9 Accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
612 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.9 Accessories
1) The motor starter protector has a screw connection. The contactor has a spring-loaded connection.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 613
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.9 Accessories
Table 6- 28 Assembly kit for reversing operation for DIN rail (size S0)
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
614 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.9 Accessories
Table 6- 29 Assembly kit for reversing operation for busbar (size S00)
Table 6- 30 Assembly kit for reversing operation for busbar (size S0)
Reference
More information ... Can be found in the chapter titled ...
About mounting the assembly kit for the busbar On busbar system (Page 598).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 615
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
616 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 617
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
618 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 619
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
620 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 621
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
622 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Note
All dimensions are specified in mm.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 623
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Figure 6-11 S00 direct-on-line starter, AC/DC, hybrid connection system, link
module 3RA2911-2FA00
Note
The version of the fuseless load feeder (S00 direct-on-line starter, AC/DC) with hybrid
connection system is not available as a 3RA2 pre-assembled combination.
SIRIUS Innovations
624 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 625
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
SIRIUS Innovations
626 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Figure 6-18 S0 direct-on-line starter, AC, hybrid connection system, link module 3RA2921-2FA00
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 627
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Figure 6-19 S0 direct-on-line starter, DC, hybrid connection system, link module 3RA2921-2FA00
Note
The versions of the fuseless load feeder (S0 direct-on-line starter, AC and DC) with hybrid
connection system are not available as 3RA2 pre-assembled combinations.
Figure 6-20 S0/S0 and S00/S0 reversing starters, AC, screw-type connection system
3RA2220-..B..-0AP0
SIRIUS Innovations
628 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Figure 6-22 S0/S0 and S00/S0 reversing starters, DC, screw-type connection system
3RA2220-..B..-0BB4
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 629
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
SIRIUS Innovations
630 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 631
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Figure 6-28 S0/S0 and S00/S0 direct-on-line starters, AC, screw-type connection system
3RA2120-..D..-0AP0
SIRIUS Innovations
632 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Figure 6-29 S0/S0 and S00/S0 reversing starters, AC, screw-type connection system
3RA2220-..D..-0AP0
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 633
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Figure 6-32 S0/S0 and S0/S00 direct-on-line starters, DC, screw-type connection system
3RA2120-..D..-0BB4
SIRIUS Innovations
634 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Figure 6-33 S0/S0 and S00/S0 reversing starters, DC, screw-type connection system
3RA2220-..D..-0BB4
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 635
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
SIRIUS Innovations
636 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.12 Circuit diagrams
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 637
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.12 Circuit diagrams
)
4
,! ,! ,!
4
3RA2120-....
)
4
,! ,! ,!
4
3RA2210-....
)
4
,! ,! ,!
$ $
4
4
$ $
SIRIUS Innovations
638 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.12 Circuit diagrams
3RA2220-....
)
4
,! ,! ,!
$ $
4
4
$ $
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 639
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.12 Circuit diagrams
SIRIUS Innovations
640 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on
3RT2 contactors 7
7.1 Standards
Approvals/Test reports
Confirmation of approvals, along with test certificates and declarations of conformity, can be
obtained on the Internet from Technical Assistance (www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-
assistance).
Reference
The standards from Catalog LV 1 "Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution SIRIUS -
SENTRON - SIVACON" in the appendix always apply. You will find extracts from the most
important standards relating to the SIRIUS modular system in the chapter titled System
overview, underStandards (Page 23).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 641
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.2 Product description
Applications
Function modules are used to perform various control jobs on automatic production lines and
for processing machines. They are suited to all time-delayed switching operations in control,
starting, protection, and regulation circuits, and ensure a high degree of repeat accuracy for
delay times, once they have been set.
Function modules are divided into those with a communication connection and those without
a communication connection.
Function modules
3RA28 function modules Solid-state timing relays with semiconductor
output
Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switches
Function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start
3RA27 function modules with communication Function modules for AS-Interface
connection Function modules for IO-Link
This chapter describes 3RA28 function modules without a communication connection. You
will find information about function modules with a communication connection in the
corresponding manuals (see Reference).
Function
Function modules are used to delay switching functions.
System integration
The 3RA28 function modules have been matched to the contactors in the 3RT2 and 3RH2
series both electrically and mechanically and can be integrated in the feeders by directly
mounting them on contactors. The function modules can be used for size S00/S0 contactors.
The 3RA27 function modules can only be used for communication-capable contactors.
Connection system
Users can choose either function modules with screw-type connection system or function
modules with spring-loaded connection system.
Reference
More information ... Is available in ...
About 3RA27 function modules for AS-Interface Manual "Function Modules for AS-Interface"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/39318922) (3ZX1012-0RA27-0AC0)
About 3RA27 function modules for IO-Link Manual "Function Modules for IO-Link"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/39319600) (3ZX1012-0RA27-1AC1)
About function modules for reversing starting The chapter titled SIRIUS 3RT2
contactors/contactor assemblies (Page 110)
SIRIUS Innovations
642 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.2 Product description
Device versions
● Function modules for direct-on-line start
– Solid-state timing relays with semiconductor output
– Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switches
● Function modules for star-delta (wye-delta) start
● Function modules for reversing starting, see 3RA23 reversing contactor assemblies in the
chapter titled Contactors (Page 110)
Characteristics
The table below provides an overview of the versions of 3RA28 function modules for
mounting on 3RT2 and 3RH2 contactors.
Feature Versions
Function modules for direct-on-line start Function module for
star-delta (wye-delta) start
Solid-state timing relay with Solid-state time-delay auxiliary
semiconductor output switch
Function ON-delay and OFF-delay with ON-delay and OFF-delay Star-delta (wye-delta) function
auxiliary voltage with/without auxiliary voltage
Order 3RA2811-.CW10/ 3RA2813-..W10/ 3RA2816-0EW20 comprising:
numbers 3RA2812-.DW10 3RA2814-..W10/ 1 basic module (3RA2912-0)
3RA2815-..W10 2 coupling modules (3RA2911-0)
Size One module for contactor sizes S00 and S0
Width 45 mm 135 mm (3 x 45 mm)
Connection Screw-type, spring-loaded Without terminals (can be used for
system contactor screw-type and spring-
loaded connection systems)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 643
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.2 Product description
SIRIUS Innovations
644 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.2 Product description
Features
The function modules have the following features:
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 645
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.2 Product description
7.2.3 Applications
Applications
The function modules for direct-on-line start are used for the time-delayed switching of
contactors. The following different function modules are available:
● Solid-state timing relay with semiconductor output
● Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch with 1 CO contactor or 1 NC contact/1 NO contact
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
646 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.2 Product description
Applications
The function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start is used to switch from star (wye) to delta
operation.
Features
The function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start has the following features:
● All modules with wide control voltage range
● Integrated varistor (surge suppressor)
● One module kit for contactor screw-type and spring-loaded connection systems
● One module kit for both S00 and S0 size contactors (options only with main circuit
connecting comb)
● Wide voltage range (24 to 240 V AC/DC) and
● 3 selectable time ranges (10 s, 30 s, 60 s)
● Operating time adjustment from 5 to 100% per time range (corresponds to 0.5 s to 60 s)
● Changeover delay set to a non-adjustable value of 50 ms
● Switch position indication for the contactor below in the form of a mechanical switch
position indicator (plunger)
● Control exclusively via A1/A2 on the line contactor below
● No further wiring required
The wide voltage and the wide time range ensure advanced use of the function modules.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 647
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.2 Product description
3RA2816-0EW20 function module for contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start
The function module for plugging into contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start for
size S00 and S0 comprises the following devices:
● 1 basic module with time setting
● 2 coupling modules with corresponding connecting cable to coupling or function module
The function module replaces the entire control circuit wiring and combines the functions of
the following devices and tasks:
● Timing relay star-delta (wye-delta) function
● Auxiliary switches
● Auxiliary conductor wiring
● Electrical interlock
● Switch position indicator for the contactor below (plunger)
SIRIUS Innovations
648 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.2 Product description
Function module for direct-on-line start (solid-state timing relays with semiconductor output/solid-state
time-delay auxiliary switches)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 649
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.3 Product combinations
Product combinations
Since the products from the innovative SIRIUS modular system are matched to one another
both electrically and mechanically, they can be combined quickly and easily.
The 3RA28 function modules are dimensioned for 24 to 240 V AC/DC contactors (0.85 to
1.1 Us), size S00 and S0. You can mount the function modules on the front of SIRIUS
3RT2/3RH2 contactors or 3RA24 contactor assemblies.
3RA24 pre-wired assemblies are available for star-delta (wye-delta) start.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
650 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.4 Functions
7.4 Functions
Contacts
Function modules are available with the following contacts:
Time ranges
The function modules support time-delayed switching from 0.05 to 100 s.
NOTICE
Rated operational current, residual current in the case of non-switched output and voltage
drop in the case of switched output need to be taken into account.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 651
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.4 Functions
Function charts
3RA2811-.CW10 3RA28
A3/A2
Q
3RA2813-.AW10 A1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
3RA2813-.FW10 A1/A2
27/28
35/36
t
Method of operation
The set operating time t starts when the solid-state timing relay (3RA2811) with
semiconductor output is connected to the supply voltage via A3 (timing relay) and A2
(contactor). Once the time has elapsed, the semiconductor switches through and controls
the contactor below.
The supply voltage is connected to the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch (3RA2813) via
A1/A2 (contactor). The set operating time t starts when the supply voltage is connected. The
output relay switches once the time has elapsed.
SIRIUS Innovations
652 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.4 Functions
Contacts
Function modules are available with the following contacts:
Time ranges
The function modules support time-delayed switching from 0.05 to 100 s.
Function charts
3RA2812-.DW10 A3/A4
≥35 ms
B1/A4
Q
t
3RA2814-.AW10 A3/A2
B1/A2
≥ 35 ms
15/18
15/16
t
3RA2814-.FW10 A3/A2
B1/A2
≥ 35 ms
27/28
35/36
t
Method of operation
On the solid-state timing relay (3RA2812), the supply voltage is connected via terminals
A3/A4. If the control voltage is connected to start contact B1, the semiconductor will switch
through and control the contactor below. The operating time t starts when the start contact is
disconnected. The minimum ON duration of 35 ms must be observed.
The supply voltage is connected to the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch (3RA2814) via
terminals A3 and A2 (contactor). The output relay switches when the control voltage is
connected to the start contact B1. The operating time t starts when the start contact is
disconnected. The minimum ON duration of 35 ms must be observed.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 653
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.4 Functions
Contacts
Function modules are available with the following contacts:
3RA2815-.AW10: 1 CO contact
3RA2815-.FW10: 1 NC contact and 1 NO contact
Time ranges
The function modules support time-delayed switching from 0.05 to 100 s.
Function charts
3RA2815-.AW10 ≥200 ms
A1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
3RA2815-.FW10 ≥200 ms
A1/A2
27/28
35/36
t
Method of operation
When the voltage is connected to A1/A2 (contactor), the solid-state time-delay auxiliary
switch (3RA2815) switches the output relay. The operating time t starts when the voltage is
disconnected. The relay switches back to the idle state at the end of the operating time t.
There is an assurance that if the minimum ON duration is not observed either the time lapse
will not start or, if the time lapse has started, it will always be completed in an orderly
fashion. Users can rely on intermediate states of the functional sequence, such as "no relay
dropout", being detected. The minimum ON duration of 200 ms must be observed.
SIRIUS Innovations
654 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.4 Functions
Contacts
The function module (comprising basic module with integrated control logic and 2 coupling
modules) has 2 internal NO contacts.
Time ranges
The start time in star operation can be set between 0.5 and 60 s. The changeover delay is
set to a non-adjustable value of 50 ms.
Function chart
3RA2816-0EW20
4
<4
˂4
VV PV
Method of operation
The function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start is responsible for the electrical interlock
and the timing relay function (dead interval from star (wye) operation to delta operation).
Control is exclusively via A1/A2 on the line contactor below. Additional wiring is therefore not
required. The supply voltage is routed via a ribbon cable, eliminating the need for control
circuit wiring.
The instantaneous star contact and the time-delayed delta contact share the same contact
root.
To avoid inter-phase short circuits, the changeover delay from star (wye) to delta is 50 ms.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 655
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.5 Configuration
7.5 Configuration
7.5.1 Configuration
3RA2811-.CW10
/ 3RA28
$ $ A3/A2
5$ 4 Q
$
t
1
The 3RA2811 solid-state timing relay with semiconductor output is connected to the
contactor coil in series.
Note
Contactor coil terminal A1 must not be connected.
3RA2812-.DW10
/ A3/A4
6 ≥35 ms
$ % $
B1/A4
5$ 4
$ $
Q
1
t
If the 3RA2812 solid-state timing relay with semiconductor output is fitted, the contactor coil
is contacted through the timing relay.
Note
Contactor coil terminals A1 and A2 must not be connected.
SIRIUS Innovations
656 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.5 Configuration
3RA2813
L1(+) A1/A2
S1
A1
15/18
15 15/16
Q t
16 18
A2
N(-)
L1(+) A1/A2
S1
A1
27/28
27 35 35/36
Q t
28 36
A2
N(-)
The 3RA2813 solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch has the following features:
● The voltage is supplied through the plug-in contacts directly via the contactor's coil
terminals, parallel to A1/A2.
● The timing function is activated by switching on the contactor on which the delayed
auxiliary switch is mounted.
● A varistor is integrated in the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch to attenuate contactor
coil switching overvoltages.
3RA2814
L1(+) A3/A2
S1
A3 B1/A2
A1 = B1
15
≥ 35 ms
Q 15/18
16 18 15/16
A2
N(-) t
L1(+) A3/A2
S1 B1/A2
A1 = B1 A3
27 35
≥ 35 ms
Q 27/28
28 36 35/36
A2
N(-) t
The 3RA2814 solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch has the following features:
● Voltage is supplied directly through plug-in contact A2 through the contactor's coil
terminals and terminal A3 on the timing relay.
● The timing function is activated by switching on the contactor on which the delayed
auxiliary switch is mounted, via A1 on the contactor coil.
● The 3RA2814 works with auxiliary voltage.
● The minimum ON duration at the start contact is 35 ms.
● A varistor is integrated in the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch to attenuate contactor
coil switching overvoltages.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 657
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.5 Configuration
3RA2815-..W10
L1(+) ≥200 ms
S1
A1 A1/A2
15
15/18
Q 15/16
16 18 t
A2
N(-)
L1(+) ≥200 ms
S1
A1 A1/A2
27 35
27/28
Q 35/36
28 36 t
A2
N(-)
The 3RA2815 solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch has the following features:
● The voltage is supplied through the plug-in contacts directly via the contactor's coil
terminals, parallel to A1/A2.
● The timing function is activated by switching on the contactor on which the delayed
auxiliary switch is mounted.
● The 3RA2815 solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch works without auxiliary voltage.
● The minimum ON duration is 200 ms.
● A varistor is integrated in the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch to attenuate contactor
coil switching overvoltages.
Note
The setting of the output contacts is not defined in as-supplied state (bistable relay).
Connect the control voltage and then disconnect it again to set the contacts to the normal
position.
SIRIUS Innovations
658 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.5 Configuration
3RA2816-0EW20
1/ $
4
<4
˂4
VV PV
The 3RA2816 function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start has the following features:
● The voltage is supplied through the plug-in contacts directly via the contactor's coil
terminals, parallel to A1/A2.
● The start time in star operation is activated by switching on the contactor.
● The changeover delay is 50 ms (this is a non-adjustable value).
● A varistor is integrated in the basic module to attenuate contactor coil switching
overvoltages.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 659
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.6 Mounting
7.6 Mounting
Note
For the "OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage" function
The setting of the output contact is not defined in as-supplied state (bistable relay). Connect
the control voltage and then disconnect it again to set the contact to the normal position.
Note
The solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch cannot be attached to coupling relays.
7.6.3 Mounting
7.6.3.1 Function modules for direct-on-line start (solid-state timing relay with semiconductor
output/solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage
Can Cause Death, Serious Injury or Property Damage
Before starting work, therefore, disconnect the system and devices from the power supply.
The function modules for direct-on-line start (solid-state timing relay with semiconductor
output/solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch) are connected to the front of the contactors.
SIRIUS Innovations
660 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.6 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 661
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.6 Mounting
DANGER
Hazardous voltage
Can Cause Death, Serious Injury or Property Damage
Before starting work, therefore, disconnect the system and devices from the power supply.
Prerequisite for mounting the function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start
Note
To mount the timing relay for star-delta (wye-delta) start you need to disassemble the link
modules (which will vary depending on the connection system) used to connect the control
current paths of the pre-wired contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start.
Figure 7-4 Removal of the wiring modules for connecting the control current paths
(shown using the example of a contactor reversing assembly with screw-type
connections of size S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
662 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.6 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 663
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.6 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
664 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.6 Mounting
7.6.4 Disassembly
7.6.4.1 Function modules for direct-on-line start (solid-state timing relay with semiconductor
output/solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage
Can Cause Death, Serious Injury or Property Damage
Before starting work, therefore, disconnect the system and devices from the power supply.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 665
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.6 Mounting
DANGER
Hazardous voltage
Can Cause Death, Serious Injury or Property Damage
Before starting work, therefore, disconnect the system and devices from the power supply.
SIRIUS Innovations
666 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.6 Mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 667
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.6 Mounting
DANGER
Hazardous voltage
Can Cause Death, Serious Injury or Property Damage
Before starting work, therefore, disconnect the system and devices from the power supply.
SIRIUS Innovations
668 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.7 Connection
7.7 Connection
Connection types
The solid-state timing relay with semiconductor output is connected via removable terminals
with the following connection options:
● Screw-type
● Spring-loaded
Connection
The Connection systems (Page 74) section of the chapter titled System overview describes
how the screw-type/spring-loaded connections are made.
Note
During the mounting process, the solid-state timing relay is connected to coil terminals A1
and A2 at the same time (by means of plug-in contacts). Contactor coil terminals which are
not required are not covered by the timing relay enclosure.
Avoid incorrect connection.
NOTICE
The 3RA2811 timing relay with ON-delay is connected to the contactor coil in series.
Contactor coil terminal A1 must not be connected.
1
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 669
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.7 Connection
NOTICE
If the 3RA2812 timing relay with OFF-delay is fitted, the contactor coil is contacted through
the timing relay.
Contactor coil terminals A1 and A2 must not be connected.
1
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
670 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.7 Connection
Connection types
The solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch is connected via removable terminals with the
following connection options:
● Screw-type
● Spring-loaded
Connection
The Connection systems (Page 74) section of the chapter titled System overview describes
how the screw-type/spring-loaded connections are made.
3RA2813-.FW10 27 NO L1(+)
ON-delay, 1 NC 28 NO S1
contact/1 NO contact 35 NC A1
27 35
36 NC
Q
28 36
A2
N(-)
3RA2814-.AW10 18 NO L1(+)
OFF-delay, 1 CO 15 NC S1
A3
contact 16 NC A1 = B1
15
A3 (+)
Q
16 18
A2
N(-)
3RA2814-.FW10 27 NO L1(+)
OFF-delay with 28 NO S1
A3
auxiliary voltage, 1 NC 35 NC A1 = B1
27 35
contact/1 NO contact 36 NC
A3 (+)
Q
28 36
A2
N(-)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 671
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.7 Connection
3RA2815-.FW10 27 NO L1(+)
OFF-delay without 28 NO S1
auxiliary voltage, 1 NC 35 NC A1
27 35
contact/1 NO contact 36 NC
Q
28 36
A2
N(-)
Reference
Control
Control is exclusively via terminals A1 and A2 on the line contactor; no further control circuit
wiring is required.
1/ $
SIRIUS Innovations
672 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.8 Operation
7.8 Operation
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 673
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.9 Accessories
7.9 Accessories
Description
Sealable covers are transparent molded-plastic caps with a break-off clip (preset breaking
point).
You can use a sealable cover cap to protect 3RA27 and 3RA28 function modules against
unauthorized operation.
SIRIUS Innovations
674 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 675
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
676 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.11 Dimension drawings
Note
All dimensions are specified in mm.
7.11.1 Solid-state timing relays with semiconductor output and solid-state time-delay
auxiliary switches
D H F
G
E
MLFB a b c d e
3RT2.1.-2 45 70 142 35 5
3RT2.2.-2 (AC) 45 101.5 166 51 5
3RT2.2.-2 (DC) 45 101.5 176 51 5
D H F
G
E
MLFB a b c d e
3RT2.1.-1 45 57.5 142 28 5
3RT2.2.-1 (AC) 45 85 166 41 5
3RT2.2.-1 (DC) 45 85 176 41 5
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 677
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.11 Dimension drawings
G
E
MLFB a b c d e
3RT2.1.-2 135 84 142 43 5
3RT2.2.-2 (AC) 135 114 166 59 5
3RT2.2.-2 (DC) 135 114 176 59 5
D H F
G
E
MLFB a b c d e
3RT2.1.-1 135 68 142 36 5
3RT2.2.-1 (AC) 135 101 166 53 5
3RT2.2.-1 (DC) 135 101 176 53 5
SIRIUS Innovations
678 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.12 Circuit diagrams
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 679
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.12 Circuit diagrams
3RA2811-.CW10
$
$
$
3RA2812-.DW10
$ %
$
$
$
3RA2813-.AW10 3RA2813-.FW10
$ $
$ $
3RA2814-.AW10 3RA2814-.FW10
% %
$ $
3RA2815-.AW10 3RA2815-.FW10
$ $
$ $
SIRIUS Innovations
680 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.12 Circuit diagrams
6
5$ 5$ 5$
$
1/ $
Maintained-contact circuit
1/ $
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 681
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
7.12 Circuit diagrams
Main circuit
/ a+]9
/
/
4
)
8 9 :
0
a
0
a
SIRIUS Innovations
682 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays 8
8.1 Standards
8.1.1 Standards
Applicable standards
3RR21 analog setting current monitoring relays and 3RR22 digital setting current monitoring
relays meet the requirements of the following standards:
Table 8- 1 Standards
Reference
SIRIUS components have been approved by a whole range of bodies for various sectors
(shipbuilding, etc.). An up-to-date list of approvals appears in Chapter 20 of the Siemens
Low Voltage LV1 Catalog, and more information, as well as an option to download
certificates, can be obtained on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 683
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.2 Product description
8.2.1 Introduction
Overview
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays are suitable for current monitoring of motors or other
loads. They are capable of two- or three-phase monitoring of the rms value of AC currents,
checking that the values do not overshoot or undershoot set threshold values.
Whereas apparent current monitoring is primarily used in the rated torque range or for
overload, active current monitoring can be used to observe and evaluate the degree of
loading across a motor's entire torque range.
The 3RR2 current monitoring relays can be integrated directly in the feeder by mounting
them on 3RT2 contactors, thereby eliminating the need for the main circuit to be wired
separately. Separate transformers are not required.
For a stand-alone assembly or if an overload relay is being used at the same time, terminal
supports for stand-alone assembly are available for separate DIN rail mounting.
System integration
The current monitoring relays have been matched to the contactors in the 3RT2 series both
electrically and mechanically and can be integrated in the feeder by means of direct
mounting. This eliminates the need for the main circuit to be wired separately and no
additional transformers are required.
The current monitoring relays are available in two sizes, S00 and S0.
Connection systems
The current monitoring relays are available with the following connection system options:
● Screw-type
● Spring-loaded
Accessories
The accessories have been tailored to the current monitoring relays; they can be mounted
easily and without the need for tools.
SIRIUS Innovations
684 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.2 Product description
8.2.2 Versions
There are two different device versions:
● Basic version: Analog setting current monitoring relay 3RR214.-.A.30
With two-phase apparent current monitoring, one changeover output, and analog
adjustment, basic version relays provide a high level of monitoring reliability particularly in
the rated and overload ranges.
● Standard version: Digital setting current monitoring relay 3RR224.-.F.30
Standard version relays support three-phase current monitoring with active current
monitoring available for selection as an option. They support further diagnostic options
such as residual current and phase sequence monitoring, and are also be used to
monitor motors even below rated torque. The devices have an additional separate
semiconductor output, an actual-value display, and support digital adjustment.
8.2.3 Applications
The various 3RR2 current monitoring relays are suitable for:
● Monitoring for current overshoots and undershoots
● Monitoring for cable breaks
● Monitoring for no-load operation and load shedding (as might be the case, for example, in
the event of a torn V belt)
● Underload monitoring in the lower performance range (if a pump was running in no-load
operation, for example)
● Monitoring for overload (as might affect pumps with a soiled filter system, for example)
● Monitoring the performance of electrical loads such as heaters
● Monitoring for incorrect phase sequences on mobile equipment such as compressors or
cranes
● Monitoring for high-impedance faults to ground (caused by damaged insulation or
moisture, for example)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 685
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.2 Product description
SIRIUS Innovations
686 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.2 Product description
,Ⴃ
,Ⴍ
2 ,
BBB
a
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 687
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.2 Product description
3RR2241-1FA30
SIRIUS Innovations
688 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.3 Product combinations
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 689
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.4 Functions
8.4 Functions
Function
The 3RR2 current monitoring relay is supplied with a 24 V DC/AC or 24 to 240 V DC
auxiliary voltage and monitors the current for overshoots, undershoots or both (range
monitoring) in accordance with the parameters set. In the event of a fault, it trips at the end
of the set delay times.
SIRIUS Innovations
690 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.4 Functions
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 691
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.4 Functions
8.4.2 Function charts for Basic analog setting current monitoring relay
Memory = O: 2 I Memory = I: 2 I
I▲ %%
%%
I▼ = Off
1.
2 I
!, a, !, 2 2. I
, ,
+ \VW + \VW
a,
a,
)$8/7 )$8/7
/(' /('
OFF F LASH O F F F LASH O F F F LASH ON OFF F LASH OFF
OFF F LASH OFF F LASH ON ON F LASH OFF
slow slow slow fast
slow slow slow
onD el onD el I D el
onD el
onD el I D el
I▼ , a, ,
2
2 2.
I
I
+ \VW
+ \VW
, ,
a, a,
)$8/7 )$8/7
/(' /('
OFF F LASH ON F LASH O F F F LASH ON OFF F LASH OFF OFF F LASH O F F F LASH ON ON F LASH OFF
slow slow slow fast slow slow slow
onD el
onD el onD el I D el onD el I D el
I▲
%% %% 1.
I▼ !, , !, ,
2
2 2.
I
I
a,
, + \VW , + \VW
+ \VW + \VW
, ,
a, a,
)$8/7 )$8/7
/(' /('
OFF F LASH ON F LASH OFF F LASH ON OFF F LASH ON OFF F LASH OFF OFF F LASH OFF F LASH ON ON ON F LASH OFF
slow slow slow slow fast slow slow slow
onD el
onD el onD el I D el I D el onD el I D el
SIRIUS Innovations
692 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.4 Functions
8.4.3 Function charts for Standard digital setting current monitoring relay
Memory = no Memory = no
Relay switching behavior = NC Relay switching behavior = NO
I▲ / I!▲ %% %%
n x I▲
Q[,Ⴃ Q[,Ⴃ
,Ⴃ,Ⴃ ,Ⴃ,Ⴃ
+ \VW + \VW
a, a,
4RQ 4RQ
4RII 4RII
onD el onD el D el R sD el R sD el
onD el onD el D el R sD el R sD el
I▼ / I!▼
!, ,,,ุ, !, ,,,ุ,
I >> = yes
+ \VW + \VW
, ,
, ,
4RQ
4RQ
4RII
4RII
onD el onD el D el R sD el
onD el onD el D el R sD el
, , , ,
+ \VW + \VW
a, a,
4RQ 4RQ
4RII 4RII
onD el onD el D el R sD el D el R sD el
onD el onD el D el R sD el D el R sD el
a,
a,
4RQ 4RQ
4RII
4RII
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 693
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.5 Configuration
8.5 Configuration
SIRIUS Innovations
694 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.5 Configuration
Kneading resistance
The current monitoring relay detects changes in process states on the basis of changes in
current. This means that in cement or resin production, for example, the required state can
be detected at a specific kneading resistance, so that agitation can be terminated as a result.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 695
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.5 Configuration
SIRIUS Innovations
696 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.5 Configuration
Introduction
The following information must be taken into account when planning applications involving
current monitoring relays.
Installation altitude
The current monitoring relays are approved for installation altitudes up to 2,000 m. The
reduced air density at altitudes higher than 2,000 meters affects the relays' electrical
characteristics. The reduction factors which have to be taken into account when using
current monitoring relays at altitudes higher than 2,000 m can be obtained on request on the
Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 697
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.6 Mounting
8.6 Mounting
Minimum clearance
A minimum lateral clearance of > 6 mm must be maintained from grounded parts.
Mounting position
It can be mounted in any position.
8.6.3 Mounting/Disassembly
Table 8- 3 Mounting of 3RR2 current monitoring relay, screw-type connection system (S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
698 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.6 Mounting
Table 8- 4 Mounting of 3RR2 current monitoring relay, spring-loaded connection system (S0)
The table below shows the openings of the main conductor terminals on the contactor into
which the contacts on the current monitoring relay have to be inserted.
Main conductor terminal on the contactor (a) Main conductor terminal on the contactor (a)
(S00): (S0):
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 699
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.6 Mounting
Disassembly
To disassemble the S00/S0 assemblies from the DIN rail, press the contactor down and pull
it toward you.
Table 8- 5 Disassembly of current monitoring relays with screw-type connection system (S0)
Table 8- 6 Disassembly of current monitoring relays with spring-loaded connection system (S00)
SIRIUS Innovations
700 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.7 Connection
8.7 Connection
Connection of terminals
Depending on their design, the current monitoring relays are supplied with a 24 V AC/DC or
24 to 240 V AC/DC supply via terminals B1/B2.
The current monitoring relays monitor an AC load current which flows via device terminals
1L1/2T1 and 3L2/4T2 depending on whether monitoring has been set to check for overshoot
(I▲) or undershoot (I▼), or whether range monitoring (I▲ and I▼ ≠ OFF) has been selected.
Terminal Designation
B1 Supply voltage ∼/+
B2 Supply voltage ∼/-
32 Output relay CO contact NC contact
31 Output relay CO contact root
34 Output relay CO contact NO contact
2T1 Main circuit terminals
4T2
6T3
14/22 Feed-through contactor auxiliary switch (S00)
A2 Feed-through contactor coil terminal (S00)
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 701
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.7 Connection
Connection of terminals
Depending on their design, the current monitoring relays are supplied with a 24 V AC/DC or
24 to 240 V AC/DC supply via terminals B1/B2.
The current monitoring relays monitor an AC load current (apparent current Is or active
current Ip) which flows through device terminals 1L1/2T1, 3L2/4T2, and 5L3/6T3. The current
monitoring relay has two separate outputs which respond to separate threshold values.
In accordance with the configuration the system is monitored for overshoot (I▲ CO contact,
I!▲ semiconductor output) or undershoot (I▼ CO contact, I!▼ semiconductor output), or values
are checked within a window range (I▲ , I!▲ and I▼ , I!▼ ≠ OFF).
Terminal Designation
B1 Supply voltage ∼/+
B2 Supply voltage ∼/-
Q Semiconductor output, e.g. for pre-warning threshold
32 Output relay CO contact NC contact, e.g. for alarm threshold
31 Output relay CO contact root, e.g. for alarm threshold
34 Output relay CO contact NO contact, e.g. for alarm threshold
2T1 Main circuit terminals
4T2
6T3
14/22 Feed-through contactor auxiliary switch (S00)
A2 Feed-through contactor coil terminal (S00)
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
702 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
8.8 Operation
8.8.1.1 Parameters
Operator controls
The analog setting current monitoring relay has 4 rotary buttons and 1 slide switch for setting
parameters. To make changes to the settings, you need a screwdriver.
6
'HOV W
6
RQ'HOV
0HPRU\
2 ,
Figure 8-3 Operator controls on the analog setting current monitoring relay
Parameters
The following parameters can be set:
● ON-delay time (onDel)
● Tripping delay time (Del)
● Threshold value for current overshoot (I▲)
● Threshold value for current undershoot (I▼)
● Automatic/manual RESET (Memory)
Required tools
To set the parameters, you can use the same screwdriver as for mounting the current
monitoring relay (Pozidriv size 2 for size S00 or Pozidriv size 3 for size S0).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 703
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Setting range
The setting range for the lower threshold value (I▼) is OFF as well as continuously 1.6 A to
16 A (3RR2141-.A.30) or 4 A to 40 A (3RR2142-.A-30).
Note
Setting OFF selects "Current overshoot" monitoring mode, see the chapter titled Upper
threshold value (Page 705).
Factory setting
The lower threshold value is deactivated in the factory setting.
Changes to settings
Changes to the lower threshold value can be made by adjusting the corresponding rotary
button (I▼) with a screwdriver.
NOTICE
Deactivating monitoring
If both threshold values are deactivated (OFF), monitoring will cease.
• Current overshoot
• Current undershoot
The following parameters continue to be monitored:
• Phase failure
SIRIUS Innovations
704 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Setting range
The setting range for the upper threshold value (I▲) is continuously 1.6 A to 16 A (3RR2141-
.A.30) or 4 A to 40 A (3RR2142-.A30) as well as OFF.
Note
Setting OFF selects "Current undershoot" monitoring mode, see the chapter titled Lower
threshold value (Page 704).
Factory setting
The factory setting for the upper threshold value is as follows:
● Size S00: 8 A
● Size S0: 20 A
Changes to settings
Changes to the upper threshold value can be made by adjusting the corresponding rotary
button (I) with a screwdriver.
NOTICE
Deactivating monitoring
If both threshold values are deactivated (OFF), monitoring will cease.
• Current overshoot
• Current undershoot
The following parameters continue to be monitored:
• Phase failure
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 705
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Explanation
The set ON-delay time starts when current flow commences (I > 0) or the voltage Us is
connected. The relay picks up and the red FAULT LED flashes. During this time,
undershooting or overshooting of the set threshold values will not cause the CO contact to
respond. Once this time has elapsed, the switching contact changes the switching state and
the FAULT LED lights up continuously if the current value is outside the correct range. This
provides a means of protecting a motor with heavy-duty starting/lengthy startup, for example.
Note
Special cases wire break/phase failure
A delay time is not observed if a wire break or phase failure is detected. The current
monitoring relay responds immediately (≤ 300 ms) in such cases.
Setting range
The setting range for the ON-delay is continuously 0 s to 60 s.
Factory setting
The ON-delay is factory-set to 0 s.
Changes to settings
Changes to the ON-delay can be made by adjusting the corresponding rotary button (onDel)
with a screwdriver.
SIRIUS Innovations
706 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Explanation
The set tripping delay time starts when the load current flowing under normal operating
conditions overshoots or undershoots the corresponding set threshold value. The red FAULT
LED flashes. Once this time has elapsed, the switching contact changes the switching state
and the FAULT LED lights up continuously if the current value is still outside the correct
range. As a result, transient current oscillations are ignored and do not lead to undesirable
switching operations (alarms, for example).
Note
Special cases wire break/phase failure
A delay time is not observed if a wire break or phase failure is detected. The current
monitoring relay responds immediately (≤ 300 ms) in such cases.
Setting range
The setting range for the tripping delay is continuously 0 s to 30 s.
Factory setting
The tripping delay is factory-set to 0 s.
Changes to settings
Changes to the tripping delay time can be made by adjusting the corresponding rotary button
(Del) with a screwdriver.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 707
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
8.8.1.6 Memory
Definition of memory
The "Memory" setting controls how the device behaves following a shutdown due to a fault
and subsequent return to the normal range.
There are two possible settings:
● Automatic reset (Memory = O)
If the device is set to automatic reset, the switching contact will respond once the normal
range plus the hysteresis threshold have been reached. The red FAULT LED goes out.
The overshoot or undershoot which triggered the response is not saved.
The hysteresis is set to a fixed value of 6.25% of the set value.
● Manual RESET (Memory = I)
If manual RESET is selected, the switching contact remains in the current switching state
even if the load current returns to a permissible value.
Note
Reset with manual RESET
This saved fault condition can be reset by briefly switching to Memory = O or by
disconnecting and then reconnecting the supply voltage.
Factory setting
The device is factory-set to automatic reset.
Changes to settings
Move the slide switch (Memory) to toggle the device between automatic reset and manual
RESET.
Reference
For more information, see the chapter titled Hysteresis (Page 717).
SIRIUS Innovations
708 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Status display
On the analog setting current monitoring relay, two status LEDs indicate the operating state:
● FAULT (red)
● READY (green)
Display Meaning
FAULT off Measured value is within range limits
FAULT steady on Device has tripped
FAULT flashing slowly Delay time is running
FAULT flashing rapidly Cable break/phase failure detected
READY off No voltage at B1 - B2
READY on Voltage at B1 - B2
You will find more information about the LED display and its various settings in the chapter
titled Function charts for Basic analog setting current monitoring relay (Page 692).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 709
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
8.8.2.1 Parameters
Display information
The 3RR22 has two menus, "RUN" and "SET", which feature the following parameters:
"RUN" menu
The RUN menu shows the up-to-date current measured value. You can use the arrow keys
to switch between the current values of the individual phases. Furthermore, two symbols
representing the relay and the semiconductor output Q indicate whether delay times are
running and when the relay contacts are open or closed. The selected type of monitoring
(current monitoring for overshoot or undershoot and range monitoring) is also displayed.
In the event of faults or errors, the display also facilitates troubleshooting.
It is even possible to set threshold values for current overshoot and undershoot in this menu.
Press the SET button (< 0.5 s) to choose between the following parameters:
● Threshold value for current undershoot for the CO contact 31-32-34 (I▼)
See the chapter titled Lower threshold value (Page 715)
● Threshold value for current undershoot for the semiconductor output Q (I!▼)
See the chapter titled Lower threshold value (Page 715)
● Threshold value for current overshoot for the CO contact 31-32-34 (I▲)
See the chapter titled Upper threshold value (Page 716)
● Threshold value for current overshoot for the semiconductor output Q (I!▲)
See the chapter titled Upper threshold value (Page 716)
SIRIUS Innovations
710 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
"SET" menu
This menu is used to make basic device settings.
The following parameters can be set:
● Hysteresis (Hyst)
See the chapter titled Hysteresis (Page 717)
● ON-delay time (onDel)
See the chapter titled ON-delay time (Page 718)
● Tripping delay time (Del)
See the chapter titled Tripping delay time (Page 719)
● Reclosing delay time (RsDel)
See the chapter titled Reclosing delay time (Page 720)
● Blocking current monitoring ((n x I▲)
See the chapter titled Blocking current monitoring (Page 721)
● Fault current monitoring (I >> = yes)
See the chapter titled Fault current monitoring (Page 721)
● Memory: Automatic/manual RESET (Mem)
See the chapter titled Memory (Page 722)
● Incorrect phase sequence monitoring ( = yes)
See the chapter titled Incorrect phase sequence monitoring (Page 723)
● Load current monitoring (apparent current Is/actual current Ip)
See the chapter titled Load current monitoring (apparent current/active current)
(Page 724)
● Relay switching behavior (closed-circuit principle NC/open-circuit principle NO)
See the chapter titled Relay switching behavior (Page 725)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 711
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
581
2.
, I
,
,
I▲
12(5525
(5525 0HPRU\ \HV
! V I!
(5525 /
[,
I»
, I! ▲
6(7
H yst onD el D el RsD el n x I▲
! V V
SIRIUS Innovations
712 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Operator controls
The digital setting current monitoring relay has three buttons for navigating in menus:
● Shift button (SET button) for navigating in menus and for switching between menus
● 2 arrow keys for setting parameters
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 713
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Note
Aborting the menu switchover
The switchover process will be interrupted if the shift key is released while "SET?" or
"RUN?" is displayed. The menu will revert to the menu command you were working
with when the switch was initiated.
SIRIUS Innovations
714 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Setting range
The setting range for the lower threshold value is OFF as well as 1.6 A to 16 A (3RR2241) or
4 A to 40 A (3RR2242). The increment is 0.1 A.
Note
Setting OFF selects "Current overshoot" monitoring mode, see the chapter titled Upper
threshold value (Page 716).
Factory setting
The lower threshold value is factory-set to 1.6 A (3RR2241-.F.30)/4.0 A (3RR2242-.F.30).
Changes to settings
Changes to the lower threshold value can be made using the arrow keys. Press and hold
down the keys to speed up this process.
NOTICE
Deactivating monitoring
If both threshold values are deactivated (OFF), monitoring will cease.
• Current overshoot
• Current undershoot
• Blocking current
The following parameters continue to be monitored:
• Fault current (if activated)
• Incorrect phase sequence (if activated)
• Phase failure
The up-to-date measured value is displayed permanently.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 715
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Setting range
The setting range for the upper threshold value is 1.6 A to 16 A (3RR2241) or 4 A to 40 A
(3RR2242) as well as OFF. The increment is 0.1 A.
Note
Setting OFF selects "Current undershoot" monitoring mode, see the chapter titled Lower
threshold value (Page 715).
Factory setting
The upper threshold value is factory-set to 3.0 A (3RR2241-.F.30)/8.0 A (3RR2242-.F.30).
Changes to settings
Changes to the upper threshold value can be made using the arrow keys. Press and hold
down the keys to speed up this process.
NOTICE
Deactivating monitoring
If both threshold values are deactivated (OFF), monitoring will cease.
• Current overshoot
• Current undershoot
• Blocking current
The following parameters continue to be monitored:
• Fault current (if activated)
• Incorrect phase sequence (if activated)
• Phase failure
The up-to-date measured value is displayed permanently.
SIRIUS Innovations
716 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Hysteresis
&RUUHFWUDQJH
1RUPDOUDQJH
+\VWHUHVLVWKUHVKROG
IRUXSSHU
8SSHU WKUHVKROGYDOXH
WKUHVKROGYDOXH ,
+\VW
+\VWHUHVLVWKUHVKROG
/RZHU +\VW IRUORZHU
WKUHVKROGYDOXH WKUHVKROGYDOXH
,
0HDVXUHG
, FXUUHQW
Hysteresis
If, after the upper threshold value has been overshot to such an extent that switching was
necessary, the current returns to the normal range, switching over to the correct range will
not take place until a current which undershoots the hysteresis threshold has been reached.
The same applies if the lower threshold value is undershot.
Setting range
The setting range for the hysteresis threshold is 0.1 to 3 A (3RR2241-.F.30)/0.1 to 8.0 A
(3RR2242-.F.30) of the relevant lower and upper threshold setting with an increment of
0.1 A.
Factory setting
The hysteresis value is factory-set to 0.5 A (3RR2241-.F.30)/0.8 A (3RR2242-.F.30).
Changes to settings
Changes to the hysteresis threshold can be made using the arrow keys. Press and hold
down the keys to speed up this process.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 717
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
ON-delay time
Explanation
The set ON-delay time starts when current flow commences (S00: I > 1.1 A/S0: I > 3.0 A).
During this time, undershooting or overshooting of the set threshold values or a blocking
current error will not cause the CO contact and the semiconductor output to respond. Once
this time has elapsed, if the current value is not in the correct range, the CO contact and the
semiconductor output will change the switching state in accordance with the selected circuit
principle.
Note
Special cases wire break/phase failure (incorrect phase sequence/fault current)
When a wire break or phase failure is detected, as well as in the event of incorrect phase
sequence and fault current (if these have been activated), a delay time is not observed. The
current monitoring relay responds immediately (≤ 200 ms) in such cases.
Setting range
The setting range for the ON-delay time is 0 s to 99 s. The increment is 1 s.
Factory setting
The ON-delay time is factory-set to 0 s.
Changes to settings
Changes to the ON-delay time can be made using the arrow keys. Press and hold down the
keys to speed up this process.
SIRIUS Innovations
718 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Explanation
The set tripping delay time starts when the load current flowing under normal operating
conditions overshoots or undershoots the corresponding set threshold value. The symbols
for the CO contact and/or the semiconductor output flash. Once this time has elapsed, if the
current value has not returned to the correct range, the CO contact and the semiconductor
output will change the switching state in accordance with the selected circuit principle.
Note
Special cases wire break/phase failure (incorrect phase sequence/fault current/blocking
current)
When a wire break or phase failure is detected, as well as in the event of incorrect phase
sequence, fault current, and blocking current (if these have been activated), a delay time is
not observed. The current monitoring relay responds immediately (≤ 200 ms) in such cases.
Setting range
The setting range for the tripping delay time is 0 s to 30 s. The increment is 1 s.
Factory setting
The tripping delay time is factory-set to 0 s.
Changes to settings
Changes to the tripping delay time can be made using the arrow keys. Press and hold down
the keys to speed up this process.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 719
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Setting range
The setting range for the reclosing delay time is 0 min to 300 min. The increment is 1 min.
Factory setting
The reclosing delay time is factory-set to 0 mins.
Changes to settings
Changes to the reclosing delay time can be made using the arrow keys. Press and hold
down the keys to speed up this process.
SIRIUS Innovations
720 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Setting range
The setting range for blocking current monitoring is No (off) or 2 to 5 x I▲. The increment is
1 x I▲.
Factory setting
Blocking current monitoring is deactivated by default (No).
Changes to settings
Changes to blocking current monitoring can be made using the arrow keys. Press and hold
down the keys to speed up this process.
Factory setting
Fault current monitoring is deactivated by default.
Changes to settings
Fault current monitoring can be activated and deactivated using the arrow keys.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 721
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Memory
Definition of Memory
The "Memory" setting controls how the device behaves following current overshoot or
undershoot/fault message and subsequent return to the normal range/troubleshooting within
the hysteresis limits.
There are two possible settings:
● Automatic reset (Memory = no)
If the device is set to automatic reset, following an error message, the relay will switch
back to the initial state once a previously occurring error has been dealt with. If a
reclosing delay time (RsDel) has been set, this is also taken into consideration. The relay
does not switch back to the initial state until this time has elapsed.
● Manual RESET (Memory = yes)
If manual RESET is selected in the settings menu, the relay will remain in the current
switching state following an error message, even if a previously occurring error has been
dealt with.
Note
Reset with manual RESET
Tripping is confirmed by disconnecting and reconnecting the supply voltage or by
pressing both of the arrow keys simultaneously for at least 2.5 seconds. The device then
resumes monitoring.
Explanation
If the device is set to automatic reset, the CO contact and the semiconductor output will
respond once a previously occurring error has been dealt with and the reclosing delay time
has elapsed. A previously occurring error is, therefore, not saved.
If manual RESET is selected, the CO contact remains in the current switching state even if a
previously occurring error has been dealt with.
This saved fault condition can be reset by pressing both arrow keys at the same time or by
disconnecting and reconnecting the auxiliary voltage.
Note
Semiconductor output
The semiconductor output always responds in automatic reset.
Factory setting
The device is factory-set to automatic reset.
SIRIUS Innovations
722 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Changes to settings
Press the arrow keys to switch the device from automatic reset to manual RESET and vice
versa.
Factory setting
Incorrect phase sequence monitoring is deactivated by default.
Changes to settings
Incorrect phase sequence monitoring can be activated and deactivated using the arrow keys.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 723
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Explanation
Whereas apparent current monitoring is primarily used in the rated torque range or for
overload, active current monitoring can be used to observe and evaluate the degree of
loading across a motor's entire torque range.
FRV˳ ,>$@
/$$$=N:1P
FRV˳
,V ,S ,V[FRV˳
0>@
The diagram shows that it only makes sense to use the power factor cos φ to monitor the
rated current up to approx. 70%. At a higher rated current the change in the power factor is
too slight to produce measured values of any significance. In contrast, the monitoring quality
of the apparent current Is increases along with the torque, in other words as the rated current
rises. It is for this reason that monitoring of the apparent current is primarily used if a load
needs to be protected against overload. Integrated monitoring from no-load operation up to
overload is only possible by monitoring the active current Ip, the product of power factor and
apparent current.
Factory setting
Load current monitoring is factory-set to apparent current monitoring Is.
SIRIUS Innovations
724 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Changes to settings
Load current monitoring can be activated and deactivated using the arrow keys.
Factory setting
The device is factory-set to the closed-circuit principle (NC).
Changes to settings
Press the arrow keys to switch the device from closed- to open-circuit principle and vice
versa.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 725
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
Display information
The display can basically be divided into three different display values/symbols.
3 2
Symbol Meaning
12.5A Displays the measured current
n x I▲ • Flashing: Current is above the set blocking current
I>> • Flashing: Fault current detected
L • Flashing: Cable break/phase failure detected
• Flashing: Incorrect phase sequence detected
• Not flashing: Relay contact 31/32 open, relay contact 31/34 closed
• Flashing: Delay time (ON or tripping delay) running
• Masked out: Relay contact 31/32 closed, relay contact 31/34 open
Q • Not flashing: Semiconductor output closed, supply voltage connected
• Flashing: Delay time (ON or tripping delay) running
• Masked out: Semiconductor output open, supply voltage not switched through
Monitoring for current overshoot
SIRIUS Innovations
726 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.8 Operation
RESET
RESET
The outputs are reset dependent on the set memory behavior.
The following settings can be selected:
● Memory = yes (manual RESET), see the chapter titled Memory (Page 722)
To reset the device you need to press and hold down both arrow keys simultaneously for
more than 2.5 s. The previously occurring error has to have been dealt with, otherwise a
new error message will appear immediately.
Alternatively, the device can be reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the supply
voltage.
● Memory = no (automatic reset)
The device is reset automatically as soon as a previously occurring error has been dealt
with. The set reclosing delay time is taken into consideration.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 727
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.9 Accessories
8.9 Accessories
8.9.1 Accessories
For maximum flexibility, accessories can be added to the current monitoring relays as
required, easily, and without the need for tools.
Mountable accessories
The following accessories are available for the current monitoring relays:
● Terminal support for stand-alone assembly
For stand-alone assembly or if an overload relay is being used at the same time
● Sealable cover
To protect the parameter settings against unauthorized or unintentional manipulation
8.9.2.1 Description
For a stand-alone assembly or if an overload relay is being used at the same time, adapters
for stand-alone assembly are available for separate DIN rail mounting or screw mounting.
The current monitoring relays can also be assembled as stand-alone devices with
corresponding terminal supports for stand-alone assembly.
The accessories are exactly the same as the accessories for the 3RU21 thermal overload
relay and the 3RB3 solid-state overload relay.
SIRIUS Innovations
728 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.9 Accessories
8.9.2.2 Mounting
The terminal supports can be snapped onto 35 mm DIN rails according to DIN EN 50022.
They can also be screw-mounted.
The figure below shows how the terminal support for stand-alone assembly is mounted and
disassembled, based on the example of an analog setting current monitoring relay.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 729
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.9 Accessories
Disassembly
SIRIUS Innovations
730 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.9 Accessories
8.9.3.1 Description
A sealable cover compatible for use with all sizes (3RR2940) is available for the digital and
analog setting current monitoring relays.
The sealable cover is used to protect the rotary buttons and the slide switch on the analog
current monitoring relay and the buttons on the digital current monitoring relay against
unauthorized or unintentional manipulation.
8.9.3.2 Mounting
The diagram below shows an example mounting scenario based on mounting the sealable
cover on the 3RR21 analog setting current monitoring relay, size S0. The mounting
sequence for the sealable cover for S00 is exactly the same as that for S0.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 731
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.10 Technical data
Functions/Parameters Analog setting current monitoring relays Digital setting current monitoring relays
3RR2141-.A.30 3RR2142-.A.30 3RR2241-.F.30 3RR2242-.F.30
Rated current 1.6 to 16 A 4 to 40 A 1.6 to 16 A 4 to 40 A
Line system AC 50/60 Hz AC 50/60 Hz AC 20 to 400 Hz AC 20 to 400 Hz
configuration
Supply voltage Us • -.AA30: 24 V AC/DC • -.FA30: 24 V AC/DC
• -.AW30: 24 to 240 V AC/DC • -.FW30: 24 to 240 V AC/DC
Monitoring for current 2-phase 2-phase 3-phase 3-phase
overshoots and/or
undershoots
Contacts 1 CO contact 1 CO contact 1 semiconductor 1 semiconductor
output/1 CO contact output/1 CO contact
SIRIUS Innovations
732 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 733
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.10 Technical data
8.10.1.3 Equipment
SIRIUS Innovations
734 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 735
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
736 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 737
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
738 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.10 Technical data
Table 8- 19 Technical data for the main circuit, 3RR21 current monitoring relay
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 739
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.10 Technical data
Table 8- 20 Technical data for the main circuit connection, 3RR21 current monitoring relays
SIRIUS Innovations
740 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.10 Technical data
Table 8- 21 Technical data for the auxiliary circuit connection, 3RR21 current monitoring relays
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 741
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.10 Technical data
Table 8- 22 Technical data for the auxiliary circuit connection, 3RR21 current monitoring relays
References
SIRIUS Innovations
742 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 743
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.10 Technical data
SIRIUS Innovations
744 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.10 Technical data
Table 8- 24 Technical data for the main circuit, 3RR21 current monitoring relay
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 745
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.10 Technical data
Table 8- 25 Technical data for the main circuit connection, 3RR22 current monitoring relays
SIRIUS Innovations
746 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.10 Technical data
Table 8- 26 Technical data for the auxiliary circuit connection, 3RR22 current monitoring relays
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 747
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.10 Technical data
Table 8- 27 Technical data for the auxiliary circuit connection, 3RR22 current monitoring relays
References
SIRIUS Innovations
748 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Note
All dimensions are specified in mm.
8.11.1 Dimension drawings for 3RR21 Basic analog setting current monitoring relay
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 749
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
SIRIUS Innovations
750 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
8.11.2 Dimension drawings for 3RR22 Standard digital setting current monitoring relay
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 751
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.11 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
SIRIUS Innovations
752 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.12 Circuit diagrams
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 753
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.12 Circuit diagrams
3RR2141-1A.30
/ / / %$&'&
3RR2141-2A.30, 3RR2142-.A.30
/ / / %$&'&
3RR2241-1F.30
/ / / %$&'&
3RR2241-2F.30, 3RR2242-.F.30
/ / / %$&'&
SIRIUS Innovations
754 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Appendix A A
A.1 Types of coordination
Types of coordination
Standard DIN EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) or IEC 60947-4-1 distinguishes between
two types of coordination (type of coordination), which are referred to as coordination type
"1" and coordination type "2". The short circuit that needs to be dealt with is cleared reliably
and safely with both types of coordination; the only differences are in the extent of the
damage sustained by the device following a short circuit.
Type of coordination 1
It is permissible for the fuseless load feeder to be incapable of functioning after each short-
circuit disconnection. Damage to the contactor and the overload release is also permissible.
For 3RA2, the motor starter protector alone always achieves type of coordination "2".
Type of coordination 2
After short-circuit disconnection, there must be no damage to the overload release or to any
other part. The 3RA2 fuseless load feeder can resume operation without any parts having to
be repaired or replaced. Welding of the contactor contacts only is permitted if these can be
separated easily without significant deformation.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 755
Appendix A
A.2 More information
More information
More information is available from Siemens on the Internet via the following links.
● Product documentation
You will find a list of manuals/operating instructions, characteristic curves, and certificates
on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support).
● Product information
Catalogs and other informative documents can be obtained from the Information Center
and Download Center (www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/infomaterial).
● Online ordering system
You will find the online ordering system with all the latest data on the ordering and
information platform (http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/mall).
● Technical Assistance
Siemens supports you with all technical product and system enquiries – both before and
after delivery. You can access our Service & Support Portal on the Internet
(www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance). You can also submit your question
directly to a technical consultant using our support request service.
SIRIUS Innovations
756 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Appendix A
A.3 Correction sheet
Correction sheet
Have you noticed any errors while reading this manual? If so, please use this form to tell us
about them. We welcome comments and suggestions for improvement.
Fax response
_________________________________________________________________________________
Fax: +49 (0)9621-80-3337
Manual title:
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 757
Appendix A
A.3 Correction sheet
SIRIUS Innovations
758 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Glossary
2-phase control
Two out of three active phases are controlled by means of semiconductors. For example,
SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters feature two anti-parallel thyristors in each of
phases L1 and L3. Phase L2 is an uncontrolled phase, which is routed through the starter via
a copper link and connected directly to the corresponding output terminal.
3-phase busbar
The 3-phase busbar enables several motor starter protectors or compact starters to be fed
using a single infeed terminal.
a release
Short designation for "inverse-time delayed overload release".
Approvals
Approval of switching devices and switchgear in accordance with national standards, some
of which must be met on a mandatory basis, which exist in addition to "IEC", "CENELEC",
and "CEE" guidelines, for example. So, the North American market (the USA and Canada)
requires UL or CSA approvals, for instance. There is also an obligation to label the
equipment accordingly, i.e. the approval mark must be inscribed on the device itself.
AS-Interface
The AS-Interface is an open, international standard in accordance with EN 50295 and
IEC 62026-2 for process communication and field communication. Leading manufacturers of
actuators and sensors worldwide support AS-Interface. The electrical and mechanical
specifications of the AS-Interface Association are disclosed to interested companies.
Assembly method
SIRIUS offers maximum flexibility in terms of configuration. The system components can be
assembled as feeders or mounted separately.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 759
Glossary
Basic module
Function modules consist of at least one basic module, which can be expanded by adding
coupling modules as required. The basic module contains the control logic and, for star-delta
(wye-delta) modules, the time setting for starting in star operation and a 10-pin connector
into which the plug connectors on the coupling modules are inserted.
Bypass operation
Once the motor has been started up correctly, the thyristors in the SIRIUS soft starters are
subject to fully advanced control, meaning that the whole line voltage is applied to the motor
terminals. As the motor voltage does not have to be controlled during operation, the
thyristors are bridged by integral bypass contacts that are rated for AC1 current. This
minimizes the waste heat generated during continuous operation (which is caused by the
thyristors' power loss), and prevents the switching device's environment from heating up.
CLASS (time)
See "Tripping class".
Closing power
The power input of the magnet coils of a contactor, which is required to set the magnet
system in motion. In AC operation, this power input is usually higher than the holding power.
When running SIRIUS contactors in DC operation, the closing power is equal to the holding
power.
Connection system
SIRIUS has the right connection system for every environment: screw terminals, spring-
loaded terminals, or ring cable lug connection.
Contactor
Switching device with just one neutral position, usually without a mechanical lock, which is
not activated manually and which, under normal circuit conditions, including an operating
overload, can switch on, conduct and switch off currents. Contactors are primarily used
where high switching frequencies are involved. A distinction is made between: contactors for
switching motors (motor switches) and contactor relays for control purposes.
SIRIUS Innovations
760 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Glossary
Control kit
Tool for closing the main contacts manually by means of the handle.
Coupling module
Function modules consist of at least one basic module, which can be expanded by adding
coupling modules as required. The coupling module includes one NO contact and one 10-
pole connecting cable with a plug connector for insertion into the coupling module and basic
module; it is used for the mutual interlocking of star and delta operation. The communication-
capable version transfers signals to the other contactors and implements the electrical
interlock (reversing/star-delta (wye-delta) start) - in this case, there is no integrated
connecting cable.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 761
Glossary
Electrical interlock
Electrical dependency between switching devices, implemented by means of circuitry.
Typical for contactor controls: A contactor may only be switched on if a different one has
previously been switched off, for example. Auxiliary contacts or auxiliary switches are used
to realize an electrical interlock.
Explosion protection
Prerequisite for using electrical equipment in hazardous areas conforming to DIN EN 50014
(VDE 0170/0171). In terms of explosion protection, you must ensure that equipment which
may generate explosive arcs (plasma) during operation is enclosed in a flameproof casing.
This means that, although the potentially explosive mixture could penetrate the enclosure, if
an explosion were to occur inside it then no explosive flame could escape.
Function module
Different function modules are used for:
● Direct-on-line start
● Reversing start
● Star-delta (wye-delta) start
Function modules are also available in communication-capable versions with AS-i or IO-Link,
in order to establish a connection to a higher-level control system.
SIRIUS Innovations
762 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Glossary
Heavy-duty starting
Heavy starting exists if a motor requires more than 10 to 15 seconds from being switched on
to reaching its rated speed on account of its special load conditions. When heavy starting
exists, the load torque of the machine to be driven is greater during startup than in rated
operation. It takes a long time for the rated speed to be reached because large centrifugal
masses need to be accelerated (e.g. on rolling mills, centrifuges). Special overload relays
(heavy-duty starting relays, solid-state overload relays) or thermistor motor protection
devices must be used to protect heavy-starting motors.
Holding power
The power input of the magnet coils of a contactor, which depends on the continuously
consumed current, and which is required to hold the magnet system in the ON state.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 763
Glossary
IO-Link
IO-Link is a new communication standard for sensors and actuators - defined by the
PROFIBUS User Organization (PNO). The IO-Link technology is based on a point-to-point
connection of the sensors and actuators to the control. Therefore, this technology is not a
bus system, but an enhanced version of a classic point-to-point connection. In addition to the
cyclic operating data, comprehensive parameters and diagnostics data are transferred for
the connected sensors and actuators. The connection system consists of a three-pole
standard cable or three single wires.
Leakage current
If semiconductors are used to control the current flow, no galvanic isolation can take place
within the device. This means that, even when the supply is disconnected, if a connected
load is present then a small residual current, known as the leakage current, will still flow.
Main switch
Every industrial machine which falls under the scope of DIN EN 60204 Part 1 (VDE 0113,
Part 1) must be equipped with a main switch which disconnects all electrical equipment from
the network while cleaning, maintenance, and repair work is being carried out, as well as
during long periods of downtime. Usually a switch which can be operated by hand is
stipulated in order to prevent electrical or mechanical hazards. The main switch can also
function as an EMERGENCY-STOP device.
It must meet the following requirements:
1. Externally accessible handle
2. Only one "Off" position and one "On" position with allocated stops
3. Two positions labeled "0" and "I"
4. Lockable "Off" position
SIRIUS Innovations
764 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Glossary
5. Cover for the power supply terminals to protect against accidental contact
6. The switching capacity must correspond to AC-23 for motor switches and AC-22 for load-
break switches (utilization category).
7. Switch position displayed automatically
Modular system
The SIRIUS modular system offers all the functions and devices needed for switching,
starting, protecting, and monitoring motors and systems. In other words, it provides a
modular range of standard components, which are perfectly matched to one another, can be
combined really easily, and use the same accessories.
Motor protection
Protection for three-phase motors against overload and short circuit, i.e. protection for the
winding insulation against impermissible heating.
n release
Short designation for "instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release".
OFF-delay
The time interval effected by a timing relay or timer (on contactors, for example) between a
switch-off command being issued and the contacts of the timing relay or timer reaching their
initial position.
ON time in %
The duty ratio ON time in % is the ratio between the load duration and the cycle duration for
loads that are frequently switched on and off.
Operating range
Range within which the operating voltage of a contactor may deviate from the rated
operating voltage without impairing the operational reliability of the switching device (e.g.
contactor drop-out).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 765
Glossary
Overload relay
Inverse-time delayed relay which responds to an overload in accordance with a time-current
characteristic, thus protecting the switching device and load from overloads.
Overload release
Overcurrent release that provides protection against overload.
SIRIUS Innovations
766 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Glossary
Protective technology
A basic distinction can be made between two current-based protective technologies: thermal
and electronic protection. Motor starter protectors and thermal overload relays provide
protection by means of bimetal releases, while solid-state overload relays, 3RW40 soft
starters, and 3RA6 compact starters offer protection via electronic means. Electronic
protective devices not only offer a significantly lower level of power loss, they also provide a
wide setting range of 1:4 and, as a result, much less variance than thermal releases. The
SIRIUS modular system offers the right solution for every type of switching technology.
Ramp time
With SIRIUS soft starters, the length of the set ramp time determines the time taken to
increase the motor voltage from the parameterized starting voltage to the line voltage. This
influences the motor's acceleration torque, which drives the load during the startup process.
A longer ramp time results in a lower acceleration torque as the motor is started up. The
startup is slower and smoother as a result. The ramp time should be long enough for the
motor to reach its nominal speed. If the time selected is too short, in other words if the ramp
time ends before the motor has started up successfully, a very high starting current that can
even equal the direct starting current at the same speed occurs at this instant.
Ramp-down time
The "Ramp-down time" potentiometer on the SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter allows you to
specify how long power should still be supplied to the motor after the ON command has
been removed. The torque generated in the motor is reduced by means of a voltage ramp
function within this ramp-down time and the application stops smoothly.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 767
Glossary
SIRIUS Innovations
768 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Glossary
Recovery time
When a protection function in a switching device has been tripped (e.g. motor starter
protector, soft starter, overload relay, or current monitoring relay), the motor cannot be
restarted until a recovery time has elapsed. The length of the recovery time will vary,
depending on the cause of the error. For more information, refer to the corresponding
product documentation.
Response delay
The response delay is the time from when you start to enter a command until the first contact
connection is made, at the contactor, for example.
RoHS
EC Directive 2002/95/EC concerning the restriction of the use of certain hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment regulates the use of hazardous
substances in devices and components. The English abbreviation RoHS is used to refer to
this directive: (Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances), as well as all related
measures for implementing it into national legislation.
Service life
Period of time for which the switching device will work properly under normal operating
conditions. This is specified as the number of operating cycles, the electrical durability
(contact erosion), and the mechanical durability (operating cycles without load).
Short-circuit strength
This is the resistivity of a switching device in the closed state, along with its components
(e.g. releases), or a complete switchgear, to the electrodynamic (dynamic strength) and
thermal (thermal strength) stresses which arise in the event of a short circuit. The
characteristic for the dynamic stress is the rated peak withstand current, which is the
maximum instantaneous value of the short-circuit current. The characteristic for the thermal
stress of the short-circuit current is the root-mean-square value of the short-circuit current
throughout its duration.
Soft ramp-down
The same principle as that used for soft starting is applied during the ramp-down process.
This ensures that the torque generated in the motor is reduced gradually, so that the
application can ramp down smoothly.
In "soft ramp-down" mode, the natural stop process of the load is decelerated. The function
is used when the load must be prevented from stopping abruptly. This is typically the case in
applications with a low mass inertia or a high counter-torque.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 769
Glossary
Soft starter
This is a motor starter which reduces the starting torque (starting torque, break loose torque)
and the starting current of the motor in order to decrease the vibrations experienced by the
driven machine and to prevent current peaks in the network. The starting torque is reduced
because the supply voltage is initially set to a value lower than the rated voltage of the motor
(the starting torque is proportional to the square of the voltage applied). The terminal voltage
can be increased as soon as the motor starts to run. Classic ways of reducing the terminal
voltage are star-delta (wye-delta) start, startup via resistors in the stator, and startup with an
auto-transformer, for example. The use of solid-state motor controllers with switched thyristor
circuits is becoming more and more prevalent as a way of controlling the terminal voltage on
squirrel-cage motors. See also "Soft starting" and "Soft ramp-down".
Soft starting
Since the motor voltage is controlled (phase control) by an electronic soft starter during the
startup process, the consumed starting current and the starting torque generated in the
motor are also controlled.
Starting current
Three-phase asynchronous motors have a high direct starting current Istarting. Depending on
the motor type, this current can be between three and fifteen times as high as the rated
operational current. Seven or eight times the rated motor current can be assumed as a
typical value.
Starting torque
The starting torque and the breakdown torque can usually be assumed to be between two
and four times the rated torque. From the point of view of the load machine, this means that
the starting and acceleration forces exert a higher mechanical load on the machine and the
product being conveyed compared to nominal operation.
SIRIUS Innovations
770 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Glossary
Starting voltage
The starting voltage determines the starting torque of the motor for SIRIUS soft starters. A
lower starting voltage results in a lower starting torque and a lower starting current. The
starting voltage selected must be sufficiently high to ensure that motor starts up smoothly as
soon as the start command is received by the soft starter.
Switching frequency
Number of operating cycles per time unit (e.g. 15 operations per hour).
The maximum permissible switching frequency must not be exceeded because the SIRIUS
soft starters could be damaged due to thermal overloading. The switching frequency of
SIRIUS soft starters size S0 to S3 can be increased by installing an optional additional fan.
Switching technology
A basic distinction can be made between two types of switching technology: On the
electromechanical side, there are contactors, contactor assemblies, and compact starters
which can be used to implement solutions for direct-on-line start, reversing start, and star-
delta (wye-delta) start. Frequent switching or reversing, soft starting, and soft ramp-down, on
the other hand, are initiated using electronic switching devices: solid-state switching devices
and soft starters. The SIRIUS modular system offers the right solution for every type of
switching technology.
Temperature compensation
With inverse-time delayed (thermal) overload releases and relays, not only the current, but
also the ambient temperature has an effect on the tripping time. An additional bimetal strip,
which is not heated up by the current, can be used to compensate for the influence of the
ambient temperature. If solid-state overload relays are used, electronic compensation is
possible.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 771
Glossary
Timing relay
Switching device with electronic time delay, which opens or closes contacts after a specified
period of time has elapsed.
Types of coordination
Standard DIN EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) or IEC 60947-4-1 distinguishes between
two types of coordination (type of coordination), which are referred to as coordination type
"1" and coordination type "2". The short circuit that needs to be dealt with is cleared reliably
and safely with both types of coordination; the only differences are in the extent of the
damage sustained by the device following a short circuit.
For additional information, please refer to the "" appendix.
Utilization category
According to DIN EN 60947-4-1, the application area of and the load applied to power
contactors can be identified by looking at the specified utilization category in conjunction with
the specified rated operational current or the motor power and the rated voltage. An example
is utilization category AC-3 for starting and switching off squirrel-cage motors.
Voltage ramp
The SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters achieve soft starting by means of a voltage
ramp. The motor terminal voltage is increased from a parameterizable starting voltage up to
the line voltage within a definable start time.
SIRIUS Innovations
772 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Index
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 773
Index
Module for electrical remote RESET, 531, 532 Assembly kit for contactor assembly for star-delta
Release slide, 527 (wye-delta) start
Sealable cover, 533 Contactors, 218, 220
Terminal support for stand-alone assembly, 524 Assembly kit for reversing contactor assembly
Accessories - Solid-state switching devices Contactors, 211, 212
Insulating stop, 347 Automatic reset
Link module for motor starter protector, 348, 349 Current monitoring relay, 722
Accessories for busbar mounting Auxiliary contacts (contactors), 152, 160
Load feeders, 615 Integrated, 107, 160
Accessories for DIN rail mounting Time-delayed, 166
Load feeders, 614 Auxiliary contacts (motor starter protector), 392
Active current Auxiliary contacts (overload relay), 522
Current monitoring relay, 724 Auxiliary release
Active current monitoring Motor starter protector, 416, 417, 418
Current monitoring relay, 733 Auxiliary release (motor starter protector)
Actuation EMERGENCY OFF disconnection, 416
Solid-state contactor, 328 Shunt release, 416
Solid-state reversing contactor, 328 Undervoltage release, 416
Additional load module Voltage ranges, 417
Contactors, 187 Auxiliary switch
Adjustment correction factors Load feeders, 565
Frequency converter, 399 Overload relay, 500, 513
Advantages Auxiliary switch blocks
Contactors, 114 Contactor relays, 126
Current monitoring relay, 686 Contactors, 160, 163, 166
Motor starter protector, 384 Motor starter protector, 410, 411, 412
Overload relay, 489 Reversing contactor assemblies, 133
Solid-state switching devices, 325 Auxiliary switch blocks (contactors)
Ambient temperature Fitting according to standards, 164
Contactor relays, 118 Fitting rules, 163
Contactors for railway applications, 121 For contactor relays, 166
Load feeders, 573 Maximum number, 163
Motor starter protector, 397, 404 Solid-state compatible, 161
Overload relay, 507 With overlapping contacting, 161
Power contactors, 119, 120 Auxiliary switch blocks (motor starter protector)
Solid-state switching devices, 319 Solid-state compatible, 410
Apparent current Auxiliary switches (contactors)
Current monitoring relay, 724, 733 Solid-state time delay, 210
Application examples Auxiliary switches (function modules for mounting on
Current monitoring relay, 694, 695, 696 contactors)
Applications Solid-state time delay, 643, 657
Contactors, 113, 116
Current monitoring relay, 685
Function modules for mounting on contactors, 646 B
Load feeders, 568
Basic module, 219, 222
Motor starter protector, 382
Function modules for mounting on contactors, 648,
Overload relay, 488
649
Solid-state switching devices, 318
Blocked rotor
Approvals, 24, 101
Current monitoring relay, 694
Contactors, 101
Blocking current monitoring
AS-Interface, 20, 37, 86, 94, 135, 219
Current monitoring relay, 691, 721, 733
Assembly, 218, 220
Blocking voltage
SIRIUS Innovations
774 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Index
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 775
Index
SIRIUS Innovations
776 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Index
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 777
Index
SIRIUS Innovations
778 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Index
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 779
Index
SIRIUS Innovations
780 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Index
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 781
Index
Touch protection
Overload relay, 513
Transformer protection, 386
Motor starter protector, 393
Tripping characteristics
Motor starter protector, 388
Overload relay, 497, 498
Tripping classes
Load feeders, 570
Motor starter protector, 387
Overload relay, 495
Tripping delay time
Current monitoring relay, 690, 707, 719, 734
tRMS
Current monitoring relay, 690
True rms measurement
Current monitoring relay, 690
Types of coordination, 755
Load feeders, 564
Overload relay, 504, 506
U
UL
Motor starter protector, 395, 467
Solid-state switching devices, 336, 338
Underload
Current monitoring relay, 694
Utilization categories
Contactors, 113, 123, 124, 125, 126, 132, 135
V
Varistor, 169, 173
W
Wall mounting
Load feeders, 605
Wear
Current monitoring relay, 694
Wire break
Current monitoring relay, 694, 718, 733
Z
Zener diode, 169, 176
SIRIUS Innovations
782 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Service & Support
Download catalogs and information material:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/catalogs
Online Support:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support
www.siemens.com/automation